0% found this document useful (0 votes)

121 views930 pages

Prtgmanual Parte3

The document describes settings for customizing the display of sensors, including: - Setting a primary channel to display below the sensor name - Choosing to show channels independently or stacked on a graph - Defining channels for a Sensor Factory sensor using formulas that retrieve data from other sensors - Common functions for the formulas include channel(), min(), max(), avg(), and percent()

Uploaded by

Cayetano Cepillo García

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

121 views930 pages

Prtgmanual Parte3

Uploaded by

Cayetano Cepillo García

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 930

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Primary Channel Select a channel from the list to define it as the primary channel. In the
device tree, the last value of the primary channel is always displayed
below the sensor's name. The available options depend on what channels
are available for this sensor.
You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a
channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

Stack Unit This setting is only visible if you enable Stack channels on top of each
other as Graph Type. Select a unit from the list. All channels with this unit
are stacked on top of each other. By default, you cannot exclude single
channels from stacking if they use the selected unit. However, there is an
advanced procedure to do so.

Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1861
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

You cannot interrupt the inheritance for schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. The
corresponding settings from the parent objects are always active. However, you can define additional
schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. They are active at the same time as the parent
objects' settings.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Define Channels
The channels of a Sensor Factory sensor are controlled by the Channel Definition text field. Using a
special syntax, you can refer to other sensors' channels, calculate values, and add horizontal lines. You
can define Sensor Factory channels using data from any other sensor's channels on your PRTG core
server.

1862
Make sure that no channel definitions refer to channels of Sensor Factory sensors.

Example

You see a definition of two Sensor Factory sensor channels. Both use the channel() function that
collects data from the channels of other sensors in your monitoring and displays them:
#1:Local Probe Health
channel(1001,0)
#2:Local Traffic Out[kbit]
channel(1004,1)

The first channel of the Sensor Factory sensor (#1) collects data from the Health channel (ID 0) of the
Probe Health sensor (ID 1001) running on the probe device. The second channel (#2) collects data
from the Traffic Out channel (ID 1) of a traffic sensor (ID 1004) measuring the system's local network
card. Both channels are shown together in the Sensor Factory sensor's data tables and graphs.

The basic syntax for a Sensor Factory sensor channel definition looks like this:
#<id>:<name>[<unit>]
<formula>

For each channel, one section is used. A section begins with the number sign (#). Function names in
formulas are not case sensitive.

The parameters are:

§ <id> is the ID of the Sensor Factory sensor's channel. It must be a unique number that is greater than
0.
§ <name> is the name of the Sensor Factory sensor's channel (displayed in graphs and tables).

§ [<unit>] is an optional unit description for the Sensor Factory sensor's channel (for example, bytes). If
you do not provide a unit, the Sensor Factory sensor automatically selects a suitable unit string
(recommended).
§ <formula> contains the formula to calculate the Sensor Factory sensor's channel. For the formula, you
can use the following functions: channel() 1863 , min() 1865 , max() 1865 , avg() 1865 , or percent() 1865 .

Define Channels: channel() Function

The channel() function allows the Sensor Factory sensor to read the data from a channel of a source
sensor. The syntax is:
channel(<sensorId>,<channelId>)

The parameters are:

§ <sensorId> is the ID of the source sensor. It is displayed on the sensor's Overview tab.

§ <channelId> is the ID of the channel of the source sensor. It is displayed in the respective field of the
channel settings 3053 .

1863
Example

channel(2001,2)

This function reads the data from channel ID 2 of the source sensor with the ID 2001.

#1:Sample
channel(2001,2)

This full channel definition reads the data from channel ID 2 of the source sensor with the ID 2001 and
displays it in the first Sensor Factory sensor channel (#1), without any additional calculations.

Define Channels: Formula Calculations

Within a formula, the following elements are allowed to perform calculations with the values that are
returned by one or more functions.

§ Basic operations: + (add), - (subtract), * (multiply), / (divide)

Example: 3 + 5 * 2
§ Parentheses: ( )
Example: 3 * (2 + 6)
§ Compare: = (equal), <> (not equal), > (greater), < (less), >= (greater or equal), <= (less or equal)
If the comparison resolves to true, the value is 10,000. If false, the value is 0. For delta sensors, the
speed is compared.

Example

You see a Sensor Factory sensor channel definition with calculation.

#1:Traffic Total x Minus Traffic Out y
( channel(2001,-1) - channel(1004,1) ) * 2

This full channel definition results in a Sensor Factory sensor that shows a calculation with values
from two channels (channel IDs -1 and 1) of two traffic sensors (sensor IDs 2001 and 1004). The
returned values are subtracted and then multiplied by two.

Channels can be gauge values (for example, ping ms) or delta values (for example, traffic kbit/s). Not all
combinations are allowed in a formula.

When performing percentage calculation, use the percent() Function 1865 to make sure you obtain the
expected values.

There are calculations you cannot do:

§ You cannot add or subtract a delta from a gauge channel (and vice versa).

§ You cannot multiply two delta channels.

§ You cannot compare a delta with a gauge channel.

§ You cannot use a channel of (another) Sensor Factory sensor channel in the formula.

1864
Define Channels: min() and max() Functions
The min() and max() functions return the minimum or maximum of two values. The syntax is:
min(<a>,)
max(<a>,)

Values for <a> and are either numbers or channel() 1863 functions.

Examples

min(10,5)

This function returns 5, because this is the smaller value out of 10 and 5.

min( channel(2001,1),channel(2002,1) )

This function returns the minimum of the values of channel 1 of the source sensor with ID 2001 and
channel 1 of the source sensor with ID 2002.

Define Channels: avg() Function

The avg() function returns the average of the two values. This equals: (a+b) / 2. The syntax is:
avg(<a>,)

Values for <a> and are either numbers or channel() 1863 functions.

Examples

avg(20,10)

This function returns 15: (20+10) / 2 = 15.

avg( channel(2001,1),channel(2002,1) )

This function returns the average of channel 1 of the source sensor with ID 2001 and channel 1 of the
source sensor with ID 2002.

Define Channels: percent() Function

The percent() function calculates the percent value of two specified values, for example, a channel and a
fixed value. The syntax is:
percent(<source>,<maximum>,<unit>)

The parameters are:

§ <source> is the value the percent is calculated for. This is usually a channel() 1863 function.
§ <maximum> is the limit value used for the percent calculation.

1865
§ <unit> is an optional unit the maximum is provided in. You can use constants with this function (see
Define Channels: Constants 1867 below for a list). This can be used for absolute values (for example,
Ping sensors 1693 ) or calculated delta values (for example, traffic sensors). If no unit is provided, 1 is
used.
The sensor adds the unit string % automatically.

PRTG calculates: <source> / <maximum> * <unit> * 100

Examples

#1:Usage Traffic In
percent(channel(2001,0),100,kilobit)
#2:Usage Traffic Out
percent(channel(2001,1),100,kilobit)

This full channel definition results in a Sensor Factory sensor that shows two channels of a traffic
sensor (sensor ID 2001): Traffic in (channel ID 0) and traffic out (channel ID 1). The Sensor Factory
sensor displays the values % of maximum bandwidth (100 kilobit/second).

#1:Ping %
percent(channel(2002,0),200)

This full channel definition results in a Sensor Factory sensor that shows the Ping Time channel
(channel ID 0) of a Ping sensor (sensor ID 2002). The sensor displays the values as a percentage of
200 ms.

Define Channels: Horizontal Lines

You can add lines to the graph using a formula without the channel() function. Use a fixed value instead.
The syntax is:
#<id>:<name>[<unit>]
<value>

The parameters are:

§ <id> is the ID of the Sensor Factory sensor's channel and must be a unique number greater than 1.
Although the Sensor Factory sensor does not show a horizontal line as a channel, the ID has to be
unique.
§ <name> is the name of the Sensor Factory sensor's channel. PRTG does not display this name in
graphs and tables, but you can use it as a comment to describe the nature of the line.
§ [<unit>] is an optional unit description (for example, kbit/s). If you do not provide a unit, PRTG
automatically applies the line to the scale of the first Sensor Factory sensor's channel. If your Sensor
Factory sensor uses different units, provide a unit to make sure the line is added for the right scale.
Enter the unit exactly as shown in your graph's legend. If you enter a unit that does not yet exist in
your graph, a new scale is added automatically.
§ <value> contains a number defining where the line is shown in the graph.

1866
Examples

#5:Line at 100ms [ms]

100

This channel definition results in a graph that shows a horizontal line at the value of 100 on the ms
scale.

#6:Line at 2 Mbit/s [kbit/s]

2000

This channel definition results in a graph that shows a horizontal line at the value of 2000 on the kbit/s
scale.

#1:Ping Time
channel(2002,0)
#2:Line at 120ms [ms]
120

This full channel definition results in a Sensor Factory sensor that shows the Ping Time channel
(channel ID 0) of a Ping sensor (sensor ID 2002). Additionally, the sensor graphs show a horizontal
line at 120 ms.

Define Channels: Constants

The following constants are defined and can be used in calculations:

§ one = 1

§ kilo = 1000

§ mega = 1000 * kilo

§ giga = 1000 * mega

§ tera = 1000 * giga

§ byte = 1

§ kilobyte = 1024

§ megabyte = 1024 * kilobyte

§ gigabyte = 1024 * megabyte

§ terabyte = 1024 * gigabyte

§ bit = 1/8

§ kilobit = kilo / 8

§ megabit = mega / 8

§ gigabit = giga / 8

§ terabit = tera / 8

1867
Define Sensor Status: status() Function
You can control the status of a Sensor Factory sensor via the Status Definition text field if you enable
the custom formula option in the sensor settings 1858 . Using a special syntax, you can define when the
Sensor Factory sensor changes to the Down status. In all other cases, the sensor is in the Up status.
The syntax is:
status(sensorID) <boolean> status(sensorID)

The parameters are:

§ <sensorId> is the ID of the source sensor that you want to check the status of. It is displayed on the
sensor's Overview tab.
§ <boolean> is one of the Boolean operators AND, OR, or NOT. If the resulting expression is true, the
Sensor Factory sensor changes to the Down status.

Examples

status(2031) AND status(2044)

This changes the Sensor Factory sensor to the Down status if both source sensors, with IDs 2031
and 2044, are in the Down status. Otherwise the Sensor Factory sensor shows the Up status.

status(2031) OR status(2044)

This changes the Sensor Factory sensor to the Down status if at least one of the source sensors with
ID 2031 or ID 2044 is in the Down status. Otherwise the Sensor Factory sensor shows the Up status.

status(2031) AND NOT status(2044)

This changes the Sensor Factory sensor to the Down status if the source sensor with ID 2031 is in
the Down status, but the source sensor with ID 2044 is not in the Down status. Otherwise the Sensor
Factory sensor shows the Up status.

A status() function with NOT has to be connected with AND or OR if it is combined with other
status() functions:

status(sensorID) AND NOT status(sensorID)

status(sensorID) OR NOT status(sensorID)

( status(2031) AND status(2044) ) OR status(2051)

This changes the Sensor Factory sensor to the Down status if both the source sensor with ID 2031
and the source sensor with ID 2044 are in the Down status, or if the source sensor with ID 2051 is in
the Down status. Otherwise the Sensor Factory sensor shows the Up status.

Additionally, the following elements are allowed to perform calculations and comparisons with the values
that are returned by the status functions:

§ Basic operations: + (add), - (subtract), * (multiply), / (divide)

Example: 3 + 5 * 2

1868
§ Parentheses: ( )
Example: 3 * (2 + 6)

§ Compare: = (equal), <> (not equal), > (greater), < (less), >= (greater or equal), <= (less or equal)
If the comparison resolves to true, the value is 10,000. If false, the value is 0. For delta sensors, the
speed is compared.

Internally, the status() function returns the Downtime channel of the source sensor in hundreds of percent
(10,000 = 100%).

§ true corresponds to a value of 10,000, which is the Down status.

§ false corresponds to a value of 0, which is the Up status.

If you understand this, you can use more complex formulas.

Example

( status(1031) + status(1032) + status(1033) + status(1034) ) >= 20000

This changes the Sensor Factory sensor to the Down status if at least any two of the source sensors
with IDs 1031, 1032, 1033, or 1034 are in the Down status. Otherwise the Sensor Factory sensor
shows the Up status.

You can also use the status() function in channel definitions 1862 . Using this functionality, it is
possible, for example, to display the numeric status value of source sensors in a Sensor Factory
sensor channel.

Using Sensor Factory Sensors in a Cluster

If you run PRTG in a failover cluster 137 , note the following:

§ If you add a Sensor Factory sensor underneath the cluster probe, and in the Sensor Factory formula
you refer to a channel of a source sensor running on the cluster probe as well, the Sensor Factory
sensor shows the data of all cluster nodes for this channel.
§ If you add a Sensor Factory sensor underneath the local probe, and in the Sensor Factory formula you
refer to a channel of a sensor running on the cluster probe, the Sensor Factory sensor only shows
data of the primary master node for this channel.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Custom] The monitoring results from other sensors or devices. Samples for usage
are:
§ Show single channels of one or more sensors in one graph.

1869
Channel Description

§ Use the data from single channels of one or more sensors to calculate
new values (for example, you can subtract, multiply, and divide).
§ Create graphs with data from other sensors' channels and add
horizontal lines at specific vertical positions.

Downtime In the channel table on the Overview tab, this channel never shows any
values. PRTG uses this channel in graphs and reports to show the amount
of time in which the sensor was in the Down status in percent.
The Sensor Factory sensor does not show values in the Downtime
channel because they cannot be calculated for this sensor.

More
Knowledge Base

How can I monitor the overall status of the business process "email"?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60737

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Can you help me understand when the Sensor Factory sensor changes to a down status and why?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79458

What can I do with the Sensor Factory sensors of PRTG?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/583

VIDEO TUTORIAL

Sensor Factory sensor

§ https://www.paessler.com/support/videos-and-webinars/videos/factory-sensor

1870
7.8.141 sFlow Sensor
The sFlow sensor receives traffic data from an sFlow v5-compatible device and shows the traffic by type.
This sensor has several filter options to divide traffic into different channels.

Make sure that the target device supports sFlow v5.

The sensor analyzes only header traffic.

sFlow Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1881 .

1871
Sensor in Other Languages
§ Dutch: sFlow

§ French: sFlow

§ German: sFlow

§ Japanese: sFlow

§ Portuguese: sFlow

§ Russian: sFlow

§ Simplified Chinese: sFlow

§ Spanish: sFlow

§ For cloning this sensor, the following rules apply. If you add the clone to the same probe, PRTG keeps
the selected IP addresses on which it listens for Flow (NetFlow, jFlow, sFlow, IPFIX) packets. If you
add the clone to a different probe, PRTG selects all available IP addresses by default. You can change
the selected IP addresses in the sensor settings.
§ This sensor has several limitations 1872 .
§ You cannot use this sensor in cluster mode. You can only set it up on a local probe or a remote probe
but not on a cluster probe.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How can I change the default groups and channels for flow and Packet
Sniffer sensors?
§ See the Knowledge Base: Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ See the Paessler tools: Paessler sFlow Tester

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Limitations
There are some limitations that you should consider before you use this sensor:

§ The sensor only supports sFlow v5 datagrams.

§ The sensor only supports IPv4 flows.

§ The sensor only supports the "raw packet header" format.

1872
§ The sensor only supports the "Flow sample" and "Extended flow" formats. It cannot process "Counter"
formats.

§ The sensor only processes samples where the source ID matches the ifIndex of the input interface
(avoiding double-counted traffic) and ascending sequence numbers.
§ The sensor only supports sample packets of the Ethernet type "IP" (with optional VLAN tag)

§ The sensor only supports sampled packets of the types TCP and UDP.

We recommend that you use sFlow Tester for debugging.

Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

Tags Enter one or more tags. Confirm each tag with the Spacebar key, a
comma, or the Enter key. You can use tags to group objects and use tag-
filtered views later on. Tags are not case-sensitive. Tags are automatically
inherited 146 .

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

1873
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ bandwidthsensor

§ sflowsensor

Priority Select a priority for the sensor. This setting determines the position of the
sensor in lists. The highest priority is at the top of a list. Choose from the
lowest priority ( ) to the highest priority ( ).

sFlow v5 Specific Settings

Setting Description

Receive Packets on UDP Enter the UDP port number on which the flow packets are received. It
Port must match the UDP port number in the sFlow export options of the
hardware router device. The default value is 6343. Enter an integer.

Sender IP Address Enter the IP address of the sending device that you want to receive the
sFlow from. Enter an IP address to only receive data from a specific
device or leave the field empty to receive data from any device on the
specified port.

1874
Setting Description

Receive Packets on IP Select the IP addresses on which PRTG listens to sFlow packets. The list
Address of IP addresses is specific to your setup. To select an IP address, enable
a check box in front of the respective line. The IP address that you select
must match the IP address in the sFlow export options of the hardware
router device.
When you configure the export, make sure that you select the
appropriate sFlow v5 for this sensor

You can also select all items or cancel the selection by using the
check box in the table header.

Stream Data Handling Define what PRTG does with the stream and packet data:
§ Discard stream data (recommended): Do not store the stream and
packet data.
§ Store stream data only for the 'Other' channel: Only store stream and
packet data that is not otherwise filtered and is therefore accounted to
the default Other channel. PRTG stores this data in the \StreamLog
subfolder of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file
name is Streams Sensor [ID] (1).csv. This setting is for debugging
purposes. PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning interval.
§ Store all stream data: Store all stream and packet data. This setting is
for debugging purposes. PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning
interval.
Use with caution. If you enable this setting, it can create huge data
files. We recommend that you only use this setting for a short time.

Channel Configuration

1875
Setting Description

Channel Selection Define the categories that the sensor accounts the traffic to:
§ Web: Internet web traffic.

§ File Transfer: Traffic from FTP.

§ Mail: Internet mail traffic.

§ Chat: Traffic from chat and instant messaging.

§ Remote Control: Traffic from remote control applications such as RDP,

SSH, Telnet, and VNC.
§ Infrastructure: Traffic from network services such as DHCP, DNS, Ident,
ICMP, and SNMP.
§ NetBIOS: Traffic from NetBIOS communication.

§ Citrix: Traffic from Citrix applications.

§ Other Protocols: Traffic from various other protocols via UDP and TCP.

For each group, you can select how many channels the sensor uses, that
is, how detailed the sensor divides the traffic. For each group, choose
from:
§ No ( ): Do not account traffic of this group in its own channel. The
sensor accounts all traffic of this group to the default channel named
Other.
§ Yes ( ): Count all traffic of this group and summarize it in one channel.
§ Detail ( ): Count all traffic of this group and further divide it into different
channels. The traffic appears in several channels that you can see in
the Content column.
Extensive use of this option can cause load problems on the probe
system. We recommend that you set specific, well-chosen filters
for the data that you really want to analyze.
You can change the default configuration for groups and channels.
For details, see the Knowledge Base: How can I change the default
groups and channels for flow and Packet Sniffer sensors?

Filtering
For detailed information, see section Filter Rules 1880 .

1876
Filtering

Setting Description

Include Filter Define if you want to filter any traffic. If you leave this field empty, the
sensor includes all traffic. To include specific traffic only, define filters
using a special syntax.

Exclude Filter First, the sensor considers the filters in Include Filter. From this subset,
you can explicitly exclude traffic, using the same syntax.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

1877
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

Primary Toplist

Setting Description

Primary Toplist Define which Toplist is the primary Toplist of the sensor:
§ Top Talkers

§ Top Connections

§ Top Protocols

§ [Any custom Toplists you add]

PRTG shows the primary Toplist in maps when you add a Toplist
object.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1878
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

1879
Channel Unit Configuration

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Toplists
For all Flow (NetFlow, jFlow, sFlow, IPFIX) and Packet Sniffer sensors, Toplists are available on the
sensor's Overview tab. Using Toplists, you can review traffic data for small time periods in great detail.

For more information, see section Toplists 3077 .

Filter Rules
The following filter rules apply to all Flow (NetFlow, jFlow, sFlow, IPFIX) and Packet Sniffer sensors.

For more information, see section Filter Rules for Flow, IPFIX, and Packet Sniffer Sensors 3536 .

Field Possible Filter Values

IP IP address or DNS name

Port Any number

SourceIP IP address or DNS name

SourcePort Any number

DestinationIP IP address or DNS name

DestinationPort Any number

Protocol Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP),

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), any number

1880
Field Possible Filter Values

ToS Type of Service (ToS): any number

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP): any number

The following filter rules apply to sFlow sensors only.

Field Possible Filter Values

Interface Any number

InboundInterface Any number

OutboundInterface Any number

SenderIP IP address of the sending device. Use this if you have several devices that
send flow data on the same port, and you want to divide the traffic of each
device into a different channel.
Possible values: IP address or DNS name

MAC Physical address

SourceMAC Physical address

DestinationMAC Physical address

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Chat The traffic from chat and instant messaging (Internet Relay Chat (IRC),
AOL Instant Messenger (AIM)) in bytes per second

Citrix The traffic from Citrix applications in bytes per second

1881
Channel Description

FTP/P2P The traffic from file transfer (File Transfer Protocol (FTP)/Peer-to-Peer
(P2P)) in bytes per second

Infrastructure The traffic from network services (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP), Domain Name System (DNS), Ident, Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP), Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)) in bytes
per second

Mail The internet mail traffic (Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), Post
Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP))
in bytes per second

NetBIOS The traffic from NetBIOS communication in bytes per second

Other The traffic from various other protocols (User Datagram Protocol (UDP),
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)) in bytes per second

Remote Control The traffic from remote control applications (Remote Desktop Protocol
(RDP), Secure Shell (SSH), Telnet, Virtual Network Computing (VNC)) in
bytes per second

Total The total traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Various The traffic from various other sources in bytes per second

WWW The traffic from the web (HTTP, HTTPS) in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

How can I change the default groups and channels for flow and Packet Sniffer sensors?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60203

Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61272

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

PAESSLER TOOLS

sFlow Tester

1882
§ https://www.paessler.com/tools/sflowtester

1883
7.8.142 sFlow (Custom) Sensor
The sFlow (Custom) sensor receives traffic data from an sFlow v5-compatible device and shows the traffic
by type. With this sensor, you can define your own channel definitions to divide traffic into different
channels.

Make sure that the target device supports sFlow v5.

The sensor analyzes only header traffic.

sFlow (Custom) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1893 .

1884
Sensor in Other Languages
§ Dutch: sFlow (Custom)

§ French: sFlow personnalisé

§ German: sFlow (Benutzerdef.)

§ Japanese: sFlow

§ Portuguese: sFlow (customizado)

§ Russian: sFlow (н естан дартн ы й)

§ Simplified Chinese: sFlow ( )

§ Spanish: sFlow (personalizado)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ You must enable sFlow v5 export on the target device for this sensor to work. The device must send
the flow data stream to the IP address of the probe system with this sensor (either a local probe or a
remote probe).
§ This sensor does not officially support more than 50 channels. Depending on the data used with this
sensor, you might exceed the maximum number of supported channels. In this case, PRTG tries to
display all channels. Be aware, however, that you experience limited usability and performance.
§ This sensor has several limitations 1885 .
§ This sensor accepts RAW data.

§ You cannot use this sensor in cluster mode. You can only set it up on a local probe or a remote probe
but not on a cluster probe.
§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ See the Paessler tools: Paessler sFlow Tester

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Limitations
There are some limitations that you should consider before you use this sensor:

§ The sensor only supports sFlow v5 datagrams.

§ The sensor only supports IPv4 flows.

§ The sensor only supports the "raw packet header" format.

§ The sensor only supports the "Flow sample" and "Extended flow" formats. It cannot process "Counter"
formats.
§ The sensor only processes samples where the source ID matches the ifIndex of the input interface
(avoiding double-counted traffic) and ascending sequence numbers.

1885
§ The sensor only supports sample packets of the Ethernet type "IP" (with optional VLAN tag)

§ The sensor only supports sampled packets of the types TCP and UDP.

We recommend that you use sFlow Tester for debugging.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

1886
Setting Description

§ bandwidthsensor

§ sflowsensor

sFlow v5 Specific Settings

Setting Description

1887
Setting Description

You can also select all items or cancel the selection by using the
check box in the table header.

Channel Definition Enter a channel definition to divide the traffic into different channels. Enter
each definition in one line. The sensor accounts all traffic that you do not
define a channel for to the default channel Other.
For detailed information, see section Channel Definitions for Flow,
IPFIX, and Packet Sniffer Sensors 3538 .
Extensive use of many filters can cause load problems on the probe
system. We recommend that you define specific, well-chosen filters
for the data that you really want to analyze. We recommend that you do
not use more than 20 channels in graphs and tables, and not more than
100 channels in total. For performance reasons, we recommend that you
add several sensors with fewer channels each.

Filtering
For detailed information, see section Filter Rules 1892 .

1888
Filtering

Setting Description

Include Filter Define if you want to filter any traffic. If you leave this field empty, the
sensor includes all traffic. To include specific traffic only, define filters
using a special syntax.

Exclude Filter First, the sensor considers the filters in Include Filter. From this subset,
you can explicitly exclude traffic, using the same syntax.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

1889
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

Primary Toplist

Setting Description

Primary Toplist Define which Toplist is the primary Toplist of the sensor:
§ Top Talkers

§ Top Connections

§ Top Protocols

§ [Any custom Toplists you add]

PRTG shows the primary Toplist in maps when you add a Toplist
object.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1890
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

1891
Channel Unit Configuration

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

For more information, see section Toplists 3077 .

Filter Rules
The following filter rules apply to all Flow (NetFlow, jFlow, sFlow, IPFIX) and Packet Sniffer sensors.

Field Possible Filter Values

IP IP address or DNS name

Port Any number

SourceIP IP address or DNS name

SourcePort Any number

DestinationIP IP address or DNS name

DestinationPort Any number

Protocol Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP),

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), any number

ToS Type of Service (ToS): any number

1892
Field Possible Filter Values

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP): any number

The following filter rules apply to sFlow sensors only.

Field Possible Filter Values

Interface Any number

InboundInterface Any number

OutboundInterface Any number

MAC Physical address

SourceMAC Physical address

DestinationMAC Physical address

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Custom] The traffic by type according to the channel definition

Other All traffic for which no channel is defined in bytes per second

Total The total traffic in bytes per second

1893
Channel Description

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61272

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

PAESSLER TOOLS

sFlow Tester
§ https://www.paessler.com/tools/sflowtester

1894
7.8.143 SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol Sensor
The SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol sensor monitors File Transfer Protocol (FTP) servers of a
Linux/Unix system via the Secure Shell (SSH) File Transfer Protocol (FTP over SSH).

SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1901 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol

§ French: Protocole sécurisé de transfert de fichiers (SFTP)

§ German: SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol

§ Japanese: SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol

§ Portuguese: SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol

§ Russian: Защ ищ ен н ы й п ро то ко л п ередачи ф айло в SFTP

§ Simplified Chinese: SFTP

§ Spanish: SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

1895
§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sftpsensor

1896
Setting Description

Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer. The maximum timeout value is 900 seconds
(15 minutes).
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Shell Timeout (Sec.) Define a timeout in seconds for the shell response. This is the time in
seconds the sensor waits for the shell to return a response after it has
sent its specific command (for example, cat /proc/loadavg). The maximum
value is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Enter an integer.
Ensure that the shell timeout is a value that is lower than the
connection timeout to avoid potential errors.

1897
Setting Description

SSH Port Define which port this sensor uses for the SSH connection:
§ Inherit port number from parent device (default): Use the port number as
defined in the Credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM)
Systems 543 section of the parent device settings.
§ Enter custom port number: Define a custom port number below and do
not use the port number from the parent device settings.

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

SSH Engine Select the method that you want to use to access data with this SSH
sensor 3363 . We strongly recommend that you use the default engine. You
can still use the legacy mode for some time to ensure compatibility with
your target systems. Choose between:
§ Inherit from parent device (default): Use the SSH engine that you defined
in the parent device settings or higher up in the object hierarchy 140 . If
you have not changed the SSH engine, this is the recommended default
engine.
§ Default: This is the default monitoring method for SSH sensors. It
provides the best performance and security. It is set by default in
objects that are higher up in the hierarchy, so usually you can keep the
Inherit from parent device (default) option.
§ Compatibility mode (deprecated): Try this legacy method only if the
default mode does not work on a target device. The compatibility mode
is the SSH engine that PRTG used in previous versions. It is
deprecated. We will remove this legacy mode soon, so try to get your
SSH sensors running with the default SSH engine.
The option you select here overrides the selection of the SSH engine
in a higher object: a parent device, group, probe, or root.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt. This setting is for debugging purposes.
PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning interval.
§ Store result in case of error: Store the last sensor result only if the
sensor shows the Down status.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

1898
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1899
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

1900
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Response Time The response time in msec

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1901
7.8.144 Share Disk Free Sensor
The Share Disk Free sensor monitors free disk space of a share (Windows/Samba) using Server
Message Block (SMB).

Share Disk Free Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1907 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Share Disk Ruimte

§ French: Espace disponible du disque partagé

§ German: Freigaben-Speicherplatz

§ Japanese:

§ Portuguese: Disco livre para compartilhamento

§ Russian: Сво бо дн о е диско во е п ро стран ство о бщ его ресурса

§ Simplified Chinese:

§ Spanish: Espacio libre en disco compartido

Remarks
§ This sensor requires that the LanmanServer service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor only works if no quotas are enabled on the target share. If there are quotas enabled for the
user account that this sensor uses to connect to the share, the absolute value is okay, but the
percentage variable shows incorrect values.

1902
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: What can I do if PRTG doesn't succeed with monitoring a share? PE029
PE032

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

LanmanServer service To monitor shares on Windows machines, make sure that the
LanmanServer service runs on the target computer.
The display name of the service is Server.

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

1903
Setting Description

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ diskspacesensor

§ smbdiskspacesensor

Share Configuration

Setting Description

Share Enter the name of the share that you want to monitor.
You can only enter a share name, for example, C$. Do not enter a
complete Universal Naming Convention (UNC) name. The sensor
takes the server name \\server\ from the parent device.

1904
Setting Description

To provide any shares under Windows, the LanmanServer service

must run on the target computer.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:

§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

1905
For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

1906
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Free Bytes The free space in bytes

Free Space The free space in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What can I do if PRTG doesn't succeed with monitoring a share? PE029 PE032
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/513

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1907
7.8.145 SIP Options Ping Sensor
The SIP Options Ping sensor monitors the connectivity to a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server using
SIP options "Ping". The sensor sends auth and options requests to the SIP server.

You can use this sensor to monitor Voice over IP (VoIP) services.

SIP Options Ping Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1914 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SIP Opties Ping

§ French: SIP Options Ping

§ German: SIP Options Ping

§ Japanese: SIP Ping

§ Portuguese: Options SIP Ping

§ Russian: П ин г п арам етро в SIP

§ Simplified Chinese: SIP Ping

§ Spanish: Opciones SIP Ping

Remarks
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

§ An SIP server might return the error '480 Service temporarily unavailable' until at least one reachable
SIP client is connected to the server.

1908
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

.NET 4.7.2 or later This sensor requires .NET 4.7.2 or later to be installed on the probe
system (on every cluster node, if on a cluster probe).
If the framework is missing, you cannot create this sensor.
For more information, see the Knowledge Base: Which .NET version
does PRTG require?

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

1909
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ pingsensor

§ sipsensor

SIP Specific

1910
Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port to which this sensor connects. Enter an
integer. The default User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port is 5060.

User Name Enter the user name of the SIP user account that this sensor logs in to
after a successful connection to the SIP server. Enter a string.

Password Enter the password of the SIP user account that this sensor logs in to
after a successful connection to the SIP server. Enter a string.

Timeout (Sec.) Enter the timeout for the connection to the SIP server. Enter an integer.
The maximum timeout value is 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Retry Count If the connection to the SIP server fails, the sensor tries to connect again.
Enter the maximum number of retries. After the sensor reaches the
maximum count, it shows the Down status 186 . Enter an integer.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file names are
Result of Sensor [ID].txt and Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt. This setting
is for debugging purposes. PRTG overwrites these files with each
scanning interval.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

1911
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1912
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

1913
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Response Code The response code

You can individually define the status for each individual response
code by editing the lookup 3541 file
prtg.standardlookups.sip.statuscode.
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Response Time The response time in msec

More
Knowledge Base

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

What security features does PRTG include?

1914
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1915
7.8.146 SMTP Sensor
The SMTP sensor monitors a mail server using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).

The sensor can optionally send a test email with every check.

SMTP Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1923 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SMTP

§ French: SMTP

§ German: SMTP

§ Japanese: SMTP

§ Portuguese: SMTP

§ Russian: SMTP

§ Simplified Chinese: SMTP

§ Spanish: SMTP

Remarks
§ This sensor does not support Secure Remote Password (SRP) ciphers.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

1916
You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ smtpsensor

§ mailsensor

1917
Setting Description

SMTP Specific

Setting Description

Timeout (Sec.) Enter a timeout in seconds for the request. Enter an integer. The
maximum timeout value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).
If the reply takes longer than this value, the sensor cancels the
request and shows a corresponding error message.

Port Enter the number of the port that the sensor uses to send an email via
SMTP. The default port for unsecure connections is 25 and the default
ports for secure connections are 465 or 587. The actual setting depends
on the server that you connect to. Enter an integer.
We recommend that you use the default value.
If the connection is unsuccessful, try a different port number.

Authentication

1918
Setting Description

SMTP Authentication Define if you want to use authentication for the SMTP connection:
Method
§ None: Do not use any authentication method.

§ User name and password: Authenticate against the SMTP server via
user name and password.

User Name This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a user name for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

Password This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a password for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

HELO Ident Enter a server name for the HELO part of the mail protocol.
For some mail servers, the HELO identifier must be the valid principal
host domain name for the client host. For more information, see
SMTP RFC 2821.
If you leave this field empty, the value defaults to the computer name.
Only ASCII characters are allowed.

Connection Security

Setting Description

1919
Setting Description

§ Enforce transport-level security: Try to connect to the server via an

SSL/TLS-secured connection. If the server does not support this, the
sensor shows the Down status.
If the sensor connects to a server via StartTLS, the connection is first
established without connection security. After the connection has
been established, the sensor sends a certain command (StartTLS) over
the unsecured connection to negotiate a secure connection via SSL/TLS.
If the sensor does not use StartTLS, the negotiation of a secure
connection happens immediately (implicitly) so that no commands
are sent in unencrypted plain text. If no secure connection is possible, no
communication takes place.

Monitoring

Setting Description

Email Handling Define the monitoring approach when connecting to the SMTP server:
§ Do not send an email: Do not send an email, only connect to the SMTP
server.
§ Send an email: Send an email through the SMTP server. If there is an
error when sending the email, this triggers an error message and the
sensor changes to the Down status.

From This setting is only visible if you select Send email above. Specify the
address of the sender of the email. Enter a valid email address.

To This setting is only visible if you select Send email above. Specify the
address that PRTG sends the email to. Enter a valid email address.
If you define more than one recipient, separate the individual email
addresses with commas.

Topic This setting is only visible if you select Send email above. Specify the
subject that the email contains. Enter a string or leave the field empty.

1920
Setting Description

Content This setting is only visible if you select Send email above. Specify the
body that the email contains. Enter a string or leave the field empty.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

1921
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

1922
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Response Time The response time in msec

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1923
7.8.147 SMTP&IMAP Round Trip Sensor
The SMTP&IMAP Round Trip sensor monitors the time it takes for an email to reach an Internet
Message Access Protocol (IMAP) mailbox using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). It sends an
email via the parent device (an SMTP server) and then scans a dedicated IMAP mailbox until the email
arrives.

The SMTP&IMAP Round Trip sensor automatically deletes these emails from the mailbox as soon
as PRTG retrieves them. The emails only remain in the mailbox if a timeout or a restart of the PRTG
core server occurs during sensor runtime.

SMTP&IMAP Round Trip Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1933 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SMTP & IMAP Round Trip

§ French: SMTP & IMAP aller-retour

§ German: SMTP&IMAP-Übermittlung

§ Japanese: SMTP & IMAP

§ Portuguese: Ida e volta SMTP&IMAP

§ Russian: Цикл SMTP&IMAP

§ Simplified Chinese: SMTP IMAP

§ Spanish: Ida y vuelta SMTP&IMAP

1924
Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ The parent device must be an SMTP server.

§ This sensor does not support Secure Remote Password (SRP) ciphers.

§ Use dedicated email accounts with this sensor. If you use more sensors of this type, make sure that
each sensor uses its own email accounts.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

1925
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ imapsensor

§ roundtrip

§ mailsensor

Email Settings

Setting Description

From Specify the email address of the email's sender. Enter a valid email
address.

To Specify the address that PRTG sends the emails to. Enter a valid email
address.
You can only enter one email address.

1926
Step 1: Send Email Using Parent Device (SMTP Server)
In this step, you configure how the sensor sends the emails. The sensor uses the IP Address/DNS
Name of the parent device (an SMTP server).

Step 1: Send Email Using Parent Device (SMTP Server)

Setting Description

Timeout for SMTP Enter a timeout in seconds for the request. Enter an integer. The
Connection (Sec.) maximum timeout value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).
If the reply takes longer than this value, the sensor cancels the
request and shows a corresponding error message.

SMTP Authentication Define if you want to use authentication for the SMTP connection:
Method
§ None: Do not use any authentication method.

§ User name and password: Authenticate against the SMTP server via
user name and password.

User Name This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a user name for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

Password This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a password for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

1927
Setting Description

Additional Text for Email PRTG automatically creates the subject part of the round trip email. The
Subject subject consists of the string PRTG Roundtrip Mail:, followed by a unique
globally unique identifier (GUID) to correctly identify the email in the IMAP
mailbox, for example, PRTG Roundtrip Mail: {5E858D9C-AC70-466A-
9B2A-55630165D276}.
Use this field to place your custom text before the automatically created
text.

Connection Security

Setting Description

Transport-Level Security Define how the sensor handles the security of the connection:
§ Use transport-level security if available using StartTLS (default): Try to
connect to the server via a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport Layer
Security (TLS) secured connection and StartTLS. If the server does not
support this, the sensor tries to connect without connection security.
§ Use transport-level security if available: Try to connect to the server via
an SSL/TLS-secured connection. If the server does not support this, the
sensor tries to connect without connection security.
§ Enforce transport-level security using StartTLS: Try to connect to the
server via an SSL/TLS-secured connection and StartTLS. If the server
does not support this, the sensor shows the Down status 186 .
§ Enforce transport-level security: Try to connect to the server via an
SSL/TLS-secured connection. If the server does not support this, the
sensor shows the Down status.
If the sensor connects to a server via StartTLS, the connection is first
established without connection security. After the connection has
been established, the sensor sends a certain command (StartTLS) over
the unsecured connection to negotiate a secure connection via SSL/TLS.
If the sensor does not use StartTLS, the negotiation of a secure
connection happens immediately (implicitly) so that no commands
are sent in unencrypted plain text. If no secure connection is possible, no
communication takes place.

1928
Step 2: Check an IMAP Mailbox until Email Arrives
In this step, you configure how to receive the emails that the sensor sends.

Step 2: Check an IMAP Mailbox until Email Arrives

Setting Description

IP Address/DNS Name Specify the IMAP server. Enter a valid IP address or Domain Name
System (DNS) name.

Mailbox Specify the IMAP mailbox that you want to check. Enter the IMAP
mailbox or folder name, for example INBOX.
The IMAP mailbox or folder name must not match the sender of the
email in the From field. Otherwise, the sensor might incorrectly
interpret unsuccessful round trips as successful.

Port Specify the port that the sensor uses for the IMAP connection. The default
port for unsecure connections is 143 and the default port for secure
connections is 993. The actual setting depends on the server you connect
to.. Enter an integer.
We recommend that you use the default value.
If the connection is unsuccessful, try a different port number.

Connection Interval (Sec.) Enter the number of seconds the sensor waits between two connections
to the IMAP server. PRTG repeatedly checks the mailbox in this scanning
interval until the email arrives. Enter an integer.

1929
Setting Description

Maximum Trip Time Enter the number of seconds an email may take to arrive in the IMAP
(Sec.) mailbox. PRTG continuously checks the mailbox in this scanning interval
until the email arrives. If it does not arrive within the maximum trip time,
the sensor shows an error message. Enter an integer.

User Name Enter a user name for IMAP authentication. Enter a string.

Password Enter a password for IMAP authentication. Enter a string.

The password must not contain spaces, percent signs (%), or the
character combination !*.

Search Method Define how to search for the round trip email in the mailbox:
§ Search for the email directly (default): Send a SEARCH command to
directly find the round trip email on the IMAP server.
§ Search through all available emails: Search through all available emails
in the mailbox locally to find the round trip email. This might take some
time if you have many emails in your mailbox.

Connection Security

Setting Description

1930
Setting Description

§ Enforce transport-level security: Try to connect to the server via an

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

1931
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1932
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

1933
Channel Description

Response Time (IMAP) The response time of the IMAP server in milliseconds (msec)

Response Time (SMTP) The response time of the SMTP server in msec

Total The sum of the response time of the IMAP server and the SMTP server in
msec
This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1934
7.8.148 SMTP&POP3 Round Trip Sensor
The SMTP&POP3 Round Trip sensor monitors the time it takes for an email to reach a Post Office
Protocol version 3 (POP3) mailbox using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). It sends an email
using the parent device (an SMTP server) and then scans a dedicated POP3 mailbox until the email
comes in.

The SMTP&POP3 Round Trip sensor automatically deletes these emails from the mailbox as soon
as PRTG has retrieves them. Emails only remain in the mailbox if a timeout or a restart of the PRTG
core server occurs during sensor runtime.

SMTP&POP3 Round Trip Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1944 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SMTP & POP3 Round Trip

§ French: SMTP & POP3 aller-retour

§ German: SMTP&POP3-Übermittlung

§ Japanese: SMTP&POP3

§ Portuguese: Ida e volta SMTP&POP3

§ Russian: Цикл SMTP и POP3

§ Simplified Chinese: SMTP POP3

§ Spanish: Ida y vuelta SMTP&POP3

1935
Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ The parent device must be an SMTP server.

§ This sensor does not support Secure Remote Password (SRP) ciphers.

§ Use dedicated email accounts with this sensor. If you use more sensors of this type, make sure that
each sensor uses its own email accounts.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

1936
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ pop3sensor

§ roundtrip

§ mailsensor

Email Settings

Setting Description

From Specify the email address of the email's sender. Enter a valid email
address.

To Specify the address that PRTG sends the emails to. Enter a valid email
address.
You can only enter one email address.

1937
Step 1: Send Email Using Parent Device (SMTP Server)
In this step, you configure how the sensor sends the emails. The sensor uses the IP Address/DNS
Name of the parent device (an SMTP server).

Step 1: Send Email Using Parent Device (SMTP Server)

Setting Description

SMTP Authentication Define if you want to use authentication for the SMTP connection:
Method
§ None: Do not use any authentication method.

§ User name and password: Authenticate against the SMTP server via
user name and password.

User Name This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a user name for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

Password This setting is only visible if you select User name and password above.
Enter a password for SMTP authentication. Enter a string.

1938
Setting Description

Use this field to place your custom text before the automatically created
text.

Connection Security

connection happens immediately (implicitly) so that no commands
are sent in unencrypted plain text. If no secure connection is possible, no
communication takes place.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

1942
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1943
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Response Time (POP3) The response time of the POP3 server in milliseconds (msec)

Response Time (SMTP) The response time of the SMTP server in msec

Total The sum of the response time of the SMTP server and the POP3 server in
msec
This channel is the primary channel by default.

1944
More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

1945
7.8.149 SNMP APC Hardware Sensor
The SNMP APC Hardware sensor monitors performance counters on an APC UPS device via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The SNMP APC Hardware sensor does not appear as a running sensor, instead it is created as an
SNMP Custom Advanced sensor 2042 .

SNMP APC Hardw are Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1951 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP APC Hardware

§ French: APC matériel (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP APC Hardware

§ Japanese: SNMP APC

§ Portuguese: Hardware APC (SNMP)

§ Russian: О бо рудо ван ие SNMP APC

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP APC

§ Spanish: Hardware APC (SNMP)

Interface Shows the name of the interface (performance counter) that this sensor
monitors.

1948
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Unit String Define the unit of the numeric data that the sensor monitors at the OID.
Enter a string.

Multiplication If you want to multiply the received data with a certain value, enter the
quotient. Enter an integer.

Division If you want to divide the received data by a certain value, enter the divisor.
Enter an integer.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

1949
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1950
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Performance Counter] The performance counters on an APC UPS device

§ Actual voltage of battery

§ Capacity of battery

§ Input and output frequency

§ Input and output voltage

§ Output load

§ Remaining runtime of battery

§ Temperature of battery

1951
More
Knowledge Base

How can I monitor additional counters with the SNMP APC Hardware sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60367

How can I monitor an APC UPS that does not support SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/63674

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1952
7.8.150 SNMP Buffalo TS System Health Sensor
The SNMP Buffalo TS System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Buffalo TeraStation
network-attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

This sensor supports the following TeraStation systems: 3000, 3010, 3020, 5000, 5010, 6000, and
7000 series.

Run an auto-discovery 269 with the device template Buffalo TeraStation NAS to automatically create
SNMP Custom Table sensors 2068 with additional useful information about the TeraStation, for
example, array status, disk smart status, disk status, and Internet Small Computer System Interface
(iSCSI) status. This device template also creates SNMP sensors 3626 for traffic, memory, and load
average on the TeraStation.

SNMP Buffalo TS System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1957 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Buffalo TS Systeem Status

§ French: Buffalo TS état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Buffalo TS System Health

§ Japanese: SNMP Buffalo TS

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Buffalo TS (SNMP)

1953
§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы Buffalo TS п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Buffalo TS

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Buffalo TS (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the TeraStation 3000, 3010, 3020, 5000, 5010, 6000, and 7000 series.

§ In certain cases, this sensor might show an error message. If you encounter such an issue, open the
settings of the parent device 571 , section SNMP Compatibility Options, and set the Walk Mode to Use
GETNEXT requests.
§ This sensor has predefined limits for several metrics. You can individually change these limits in the
channel settings. For detailed information about channel limits, see section Channel Settings 3052 .
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

1954
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpbuffalots

§ buffalots

§ systemhealth

Sensor Display

Setting Description

1955
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1956
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

1 Min CPU Load Average The average CPU load in percent

Available Memory The available memory in bytes

Errors The number of errors

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Failover Status The failover status

§ Up status 186 : Busy, Idle

1957
Channel Description

§ Warning status: Initializing, Starting Backup, Starting Main, Stopping

Firmware Update If a firmware update is available

Available
§ Up status: No, Unknown

§ Warning status: Yes

Percent Available The available memory in percent

Memory

Uptime The system uptime

Warnings The number of warnings

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

For more information about sensor settings, see the following sections:

§ List of Available Sensor Types 3626

§ Additional Sensor Types (Custom Sensors) 3047

§ Channel Settings 3052

§ Notification Triggers Settings 3063

1958
7.8.151 SNMP Cisco ADSL Sensor
The SNMP Cisco ADSL sensor monitors asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) statistics of a Cisco
router via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco ADSL Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1963 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco ADSL

§ French: Cisco ADSL (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco ADSL

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco ADSL

§ Portuguese: Cisco ADSL (SNMP)

§ Russian: SNMP Cisco ADSL

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco ADSL

§ Spanish: Cisco ADSL (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

1959
§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ For a general introduction to the technology behind SNMP, see section Monitoring via SNMP 3348 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Cisco ADSL Settings

Setting Description

Line Index Select the performance counters that you want to monitor. PRTG creates
one sensor for each performance counter that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

1960
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscoadsl

Cisco ADSL Settings

Setting Description

Line Index Shows the line index (performance counter) that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

1961
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

1962
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

1963
Channel Description

Local Attenuation The local attenuation in decibels (db)

Local Power Output The local power output in db

Local SNR The local signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in db

Remote Attenuation The remote attenuation in db

Remote Power Output The remote power output in db

Remote SNR The remote SNR in db

Speed Downlink The downlink speed in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Speed Uplink The uplink speed in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1964
7.8.152 SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Connections Sensor
The SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Connections sensor monitors the VPN connections on a Cisco Adaptive
Security Appliance via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Connections Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1969 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Verbindingen

§ French: Cisco ASA connexions VPN (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN-Verbindungen

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Portuguese: Conexões VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

§ Russian: П о дклю чен ия SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Spanish: Conexiones VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

1965
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ For a general introduction to the technology behind SNMP, see section Monitoring via SNMP 3348 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

1966
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscoasavpnsensor

§ snmpciscoasavpnconnectionssensor

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

1967
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Credentials for SNMP Devices

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 399 , section Credentials for SNMP Devices.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

1968
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window
You cannot interrupt the inheritance for schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. The
corresponding settings from the parent objects are always active. However, you can define additional
schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. They are active at the same time as the parent
objects' settings.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Active Email Sessions The number of active email sessions

Active IPSec Sessions The number of active Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) sessions

Active L2L Sessions The number of active LAN-to-LAN (L2L) sessions

Active LB Sessions The number of active LB sessions

1969
Channel Description

Active Sessions The total number of active sessions

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Active SVC Sessions The number of active switched virtual circuit (SVC) sessions

Active Users The number of active users

Active WebVPN The number of active WebVPN users

Sessions

Groups With Active The number of groups with active users

Users

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1970
7.8.153 SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Traffic Sensor
The SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Traffic sensor monitors the traffic of an Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)
VPN connection on a Cisco Adaptive Security Appliance via the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).

SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Traffic Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1976 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Verkeer

§ French: Cisco ASA trafic VPN (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN-Datenverkehr

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Portuguese: Tráfego VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

§ Russian: Траф ик SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Spanish: Trafico VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor can monitor IPsec connections only.

§ This sensor is intended to monitor permanent connections. It shows an error if a connection is

interrupted.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

1971
§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: I get the error PE123 when using the SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Traffic sensor.
What can I do?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

ASA VPN Specific

Setting Description

Connections Select the IPsec VPN connections that you want to monitor. PRTG
creates one sensor for each IPsec VPN connection that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
This sensor can only monitor VPN connections based on IPsec. This
means, for example, that connections that use Cisco AnyConnect do
not appear in this list.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

1972
Setting Description

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscoasavpnsensor

§ snmpciscoasavpntrafficsensor

ASA VPN Specific

Setting Description

Remote IP Address Shows the IP address of the connection that this sensor monitors.

1973
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. We strongly

recommend that you only change it if the Paessler support team
explicitly asks you to do so. Wrong usage can result in incorrect
monitoring data.

This sensor can only monitor VPN connections based on IPsec.

Sensor Behavior Define the sensor status 186 if no active connection is available:
§ Show down status if no connection is active (recommended): Set the
sensor to the Down status if no connection is active.
§ Show warning status if no connection is active: Set the sensor to the
Warning status if no connection is active.
§ Stay in up status if no connection is active: Stay in the Up status if no
connection is active.

IKE Version Handling Select the engine for the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version handling:
§ IKEv1 (default): Select this option if the tunnel on the device uses IKEv1.

§ IKEv1 and IKEv2: Select this option if the tunnel on the device uses
IKEv1 or IKEv2.
The IKEv1 and IKEv2 option is in beta status and might not work
properly.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

1974
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Credentials for SNMP Devices

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 399 , section Credentials for SNMP Devices.

1975
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

1976
Channel Description

Total The total traffic in bytes per second

Traffic In The incoming traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Traffic Out The outgoing traffic in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

I get the error PE123 when using the SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Traffic sensor. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59643

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1977
7.8.154 SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Users Sensor
The SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Users sensor monitors account connections to a VPN on a Cisco Adaptive
Security Appliance via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Users Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1982 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Gebruikers

§ French: Cisco ASA utilisateurs VPN (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN-Benutzer

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Portuguese: Usuários VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

§ Russian: П о льзо ватели SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco ASA VPN

§ Spanish: Usuarios VPN Cisco ASA (SNMP)

Remarks
§ Do not use this sensor to monitor more than 50 VPN users, especially if they are all connected
simultaneously. For more information, see the Knowledge Base: My SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Users
sensor shows a user limit error. Why? What can I do?
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

1978
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscoasavpnsensor

§ snmpciscoasavpntrafficsensor

1979
Setting Description

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

1980
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Credentials for SNMP Devices

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 399 , section Credentials for SNMP Devices.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1981
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Account] The account status

§ Up status 186 : Offline, Online

Connected Accounts The number of connected accounts

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

1982
My SNMP Cisco ASA VPN Users sensor shows a user limit error. Why? What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64053

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1983
7.8.155 SNMP Cisco CBQoS Sensor
The SNMP Cisco CBQoS sensor monitors network parameters using Cisco's Class Based Quality of
Service (CBQoS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The sensor supports the classes Class Map, Match Statement, and Queueing.

SNMP Cisco CBQoS Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1989 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco CBQoS

§ French: Cisco CBQoS (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco CBQoS

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco CBQoS

§ Portuguese: CBQoS Cisco (SNMP)

§ Russian: SNMP Cisco CBQoS

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco CBQoS

§ Spanish: CBQoS Cisco (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

1984
§ For a general introduction to the technology behind SNMP, see section Monitoring via SNMP 3348 .

§ For a general introduction to the technology behind Quality of Service (QoS) monitoring, see section
Monitoring Quality of Service 3372 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Class Based QoS Specific

Setting Description

Entries Select the entries that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each entry that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

1985
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ cbqossensor

Class Based QoS Specific

1986
Setting Description

Object Type Shows the object type of the parameter that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Interface Shows the interface of the parameter that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Description Shows the description of the parameter that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

BitMask Shows the number of available channels for the parameter that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

ObjectID Shows the ObjectID of the parameter that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

ConfigID Shows the ConfigID of the parameter that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

1987
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1988
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Current Queue Depth The current queue depth

Drop Packets The number of drop packets per second

Drop Size The drop size per second

Maximum Queue Depth The maximum queue depth

No Buffer Drop Packets The number of drop packets without buffer per second

1989
Channel Description

Post Policy Size The post policy size per second

Pre Policy Packets The number of pre-policy packets per second

Pre Policy Size The pre-policy size per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1990
7.8.156 SNMP Cisco System Health Sensor
The SNMP Cisco System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Cisco device via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 1997 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco System Health

§ French: Cisco état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Cisco (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы устро йства SNMP Cisco

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Cisco (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

1991
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ SNMP Cisco System Health sensors that are created with the Cisco Device (Generic) device template
for auto-discovery can have additional tags.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Cisco System Health Specific

Setting Description

Measurements Select the measurements that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measurement that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

1992
Setting Description

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscosystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

Cisco System Health Specific

Setting Description

Measurements Shows the ID of the measurement that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

1993
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

1994
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

1995
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

1996
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

PRTG creates one sensor per component.

Channel Description

Available Memory [#] The available memory in bytes

CPU [#] The CPU load in percent

Fan [#] State The state of fans

§ Up status 186 : Normal
§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Critical, Not Functioning, Shutdown

§ Unknown status: Not Present

Percent Available The available memory in percent

Memory [#]

Power Supply [#] The state of power supplies

§ Up status: Normal

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Critical, Not Functioning, Shutdown

§ Unknown status: Not Present

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

1997
7.8.157 SNMP Cisco UCS Blade Sensor
The SNMP Cisco UCS Blade sensor monitors the health status of a Cisco Unified Computing System
(UCS) blade server via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco UCS Blade Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2004 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco UCS Blade

§ French: Cisco UCS serveur Blade (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco UCS Blade

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Portuguese: Blade Cisco UCS (SNMP)

§ Russian: Блейд-сервер SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Spanish: Blade Cisco UCS (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

1998
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Blade Servers Select the blade servers that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each blade server that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

1999
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscosystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

§ ucssystemhealth

§ ucs

§ blade

Sensor Settings

2000
Setting Description

Blade Servers Shows the blade server that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel Mask Shows the available channels for the blade server that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Model Shows the model of the blade server that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Serial Number Shows the serial number blade server that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2001
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2002
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2003
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Oper State The oper state

§ Up status186 : Config, Diagnostics, Disabled, Discovery, Ok, Pending

Reassociation, Pending Reboot, Test, Unconfig

§ Warning status: Bios Restore, CMOS Reset, Decomissioning,
Degraded, Maintenance, Power Problem, Restart, Thermal Problem,
Voltage Problem
§ Down status: Compute Failed, Compute Mismatch, Config Failure,
Diagnostics Failed, Discovery Failed, Inaccessible, Indeterminate,
Inoperable, Maintenance Failed, Power Off, Removed, Test Failed,
Unassociated, Unconfig Failed

Operability The operability state

§ Up status: Auto Upgrade, Operable

§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Accessibility Problem, Bios Post Timeout, Chassis Limit

Exceeded, Config, Decomissioning, Disabled, Equipment Problem,
Discovery, Discovery Failed, Fabric Connection Problem, Fabric
Unsupported Connection, Identify, Identity Unestablishable, Inoperable,
Link Activate Blocked, Malformed Fru, Not Supported, Peer Comm
Problem, Performance Problem, Post Failure, Power Problem, Powered
Off, Removed, Thermal Problem, Upgrade Problem, Voltage Problem
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Power State The power state

§ Up status: Off Duty, Ok, On, Online, Power Save, Test

§ Warning status: Degraded, Not Supported, Unknown

§ Down status:Error, Failed, Off, Offline

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

2004
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2005
7.8.158 SNMP Cisco UCS Chassis Sensor
The SNMP Cisco UCS Chassis sensor monitors the health status of the chassis of a Cisco Unified
Computing System (UCS) device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco UCS Chassis Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2011 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco UCS Chassis

§ French: Cisco UCS châssis (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco UCS Chassis

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Portuguese: Chassi Cisco UCS (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ко рп ус SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Spanish: Chasis Cisco UCS (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2006
§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Chassis Select the chassis that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each chassis that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2007
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscosystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

§ ucssystemhealth

§ ucs

§ chassis

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Chassis Shows the chassis that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2008
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2009
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2010
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Config State The configuration state

§ Up status 186 : Acknowledged, Auto Acknowledge, OK

§ Warning status: Ack in Progress, Evaluation

§ Down status: Removing, UnAcknowledged, UnInitalized, Unsupported

Connectivity

License State The license state

§ Up status: License Ok

§ Warning status: License Grace Period, Unknown

§ Down status: License Expired, License Insufficient

§ Unknown status: Not Applicable

Oper State The oper state

2011
Channel Description

§ Up status: Auto Upgrade, Operable

§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Accessibility Problem, Bios Post Timeout, Chassis Limit

Operability The operability state

§ Up status: Auto Upgrade, Operable

§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Accessibility Problem, Bios Post Timeout, Chassis Limit

Power State The power state

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Input Degraded, Output Degraded, Redundancy

Degraded, Unknown
§ Down status: Failed, Input Failed, Output Failed, Redundancy Failed

Seeprom State The serial electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

(SEEPROM) state
§ Up status: Auto Upgrade, Operable

§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Accessibility Problem, Bios Post Timeout, Chassis Limit

Thermal State The thermal state

2012
Channel Description

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2013
7.8.159 SNMP Cisco UCS Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Cisco UCS Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk of a Cisco Unified Computing
System (UCS) device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco UCS Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2019 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP-Cisco UCS fysieke schijf

§ French: Cisco UCS disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco UCS Physikalisches Laufwerk

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Portuguese: Disco físico Cisco UCS (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Spanish: Disco físico Cisco UCS (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

2014
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

UCS Physical Disk

Setting Description

Disk Select the physical disks that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each physical disk that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
This list only shows working disks that have the status Up or
Warning.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2015
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscophysicaldisksensor

§ ucs

§ snmp

UCS Physical Disk

Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Display Name Shows the display name of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2016
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2017
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2018
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Operability The operability status of the disk

§ Up status 186 : Auto Upgrade, Operable
§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Accessibility Problem, Bios Post Timeout, Chassis Limit

Exceeded, Config, Decomissioning, Disabled, Equipment Problem,
Discovery, Discovery Failed, Fabric Connection Problem, Fabric
Unsupported Connection, Identify, Identity Unestablishable, Inoperable,
Link Activate Blocked, Malformed Fru, Not Supported, Peer Comm
Problem, Performance Problem, Post Failure, Powered Off, Power
Problem, Removed, Thermal Problem, Upgrade Problem, Voltage
Problem
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Presence The connection status of the disk

§ Up status: Equipped, Equipped Not Primary

2019
Channel Description

§ Warning status: Equipped Identity Unestablishable, Mismatch,

Mismatch Identity Unestablishable, Missing,
§ Down status: Equipped With Malformed Fru, Inaccessible, Not
Supported, Unauthorized
§ Unknown status: Empty, Unknown

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2020
7.8.160 SNMP Cisco UCS System Health Sensor
The SNMP Cisco UCS System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Cisco Unified Computing
System (UCS) device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Cisco UCS System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2025 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Cisco UCS System Health

§ French: Cisco UCS état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Cisco UCS Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Cisco UCS (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Cisco UCS

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Cisco UCS (SNMP)

2021
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2022
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpciscosystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

§ ucssystemhealth

§ ucs

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2023
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2024
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Critical Faults Count The number of critical faults (that are not yet acknowledged in the UCS
logs)

2025
Channel Description

Fan Failure Predicted The predicted fan failure status

§ Up status 186 : No, Not Available

§ Down status: Yes

Fan Module Failure The predicted fan module failure status

Predicted
§ Up status: No, Not Available

§ Down status: Yes

Fan Module Performance The fan module performance status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable
§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Fan Module Thermal The fan module thermal status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable
§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Fan Modules Inoperable The number of operable fan modules

Fan Modules Operable The number of inoperable fan modules

Fan Performance The fan performance

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable
§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Fan Thermal The fan thermal status

2026
Channel Description

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Fans Inoperable The number of inoperable fan modules

Fans Operable The number of operable fan modules

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Major Faults Count The number of major faults (that are not yet acknowledged in the UCS
logs)

Minor Faults Count The number of minor faults (that are not yet acknowledged in the UCS
logs)

Power Supplies The number of inoperable power supplies

Inoperable

Power Supplies Operable The number of operable power supplies

Power Supply Failure The predicted power supply failure status

Predicted
§ Up status: No, Not Available

§ Down status: Yes

Power Supply The power supply performance

Performance
§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable
§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Power Supply Thermal The power supply thermal status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable

2027
Channel Description

§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Power Supply Voltage The power supply voltage status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Lower Non Critical, Upper Non Critical

§ Down status: Lower Critical, Lower Non Recoverable, Upper Critical,

Upper Non Recoverable
§ Unknown status: Not Supported, Unknown

Warning Count The number of warnings (that are not yet acknowledged in the UCS logs)

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2028
7.8.161 SNMP CPU Load Sensor
The SNMP CPU Load sensor monitors the system load via the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).

SNMP CPU Load Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2034 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP CPU Load

§ French: Charge CPU (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Prozessorlast

§ Japanese: SNMP CPU

§ Portuguese: Carga CPU (SNMP)

§ Russian: Загрузка ЦП SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP CPU

§ Spanish: Carga CPU (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2029
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmp

2030
Setting Description

§ cpu

§ cpuloadsensor

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2031
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2032
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2033
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Processor [#] The CPU load in percent

Total The total CPU load in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2034
7.8.162 SNMP Custom Sensor
The SNMP Custom sensor monitors a single parameter that is returned by a specific object identifier
(OID) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Custom Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2040 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP (Klant specifiek)

§ French: SNMP personnalisé

§ German: SNMP (Benutzerdef.)

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: SNMP (customizado)

§ Russian: П о льзо вательские п арам етры SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: SNMP (personalizado)

Remarks
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?

2035
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

OID Settings

Setting Description

Channel Name Enter a name for the channel in which the sensor shows the results for the
OID. Enter a string.
You can change this value later in the channel settings 3052 of this
sensor.

Value Type Select the expected numeric type of the results at the OID:
§ Absolute (unsigned integer): Integers without an operational sign, such
as 10 or 120.
§ Absolute (signed integer): Integers with an operational sign, such as -12
or 120.
§ Absolute (float): Float values, such as -5.80 or 8.23.

§ Delta (counter): Counter values. PRTG calculates the difference

between the last and the current value. PRTG additionally divides the
delta value by a time period to indicate a speed value.
This mode only works if the difference between the last and the
current value is positive and increases with each scanning interval.
This mode does not support negative values and decreasing values.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Unit String Enter the unit for the values that this sensor returns. Enter a string. PRTG
uses the unit string for display purposes and shows it in graphs, data
tables, and gauges.
If you want to change the unit after sensor creation, you can change it
in the sensor's channel settings 3052 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2036
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpcustomsensor

2037
OID Settings

OID Settings

Setting Description

OID Enter the OID of the SNMP object that you want to receive numeric data
from.
Most OIDs begin with 1.3.6.1. However, OIDs that start with 1.0, or
1.1, or 1.2 are also allowed. If you want to entirely disable the
validation of your entry, add the string norfccheck: to the beginning of the
OID, for example, norfccheck:2.0.0.0.1.

Value Type Shows the value type of the numeric data that this sensor receives from
the OID.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Multiplication If you want to multiply the received data with a certain value, enter the
multiplier. Use the default value 1 to not change the received value. Enter
an integer.

Division If you want to divide the received data by a certain value, enter the divisor.
Use the default value 1 to not change the received value. Enter an integer.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

2038
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2039
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2040
Channel Description

[Value] The single numeric value (int64) for a specified OID

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/903

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

VIDEO TUTORIAL

SNMP Custom sensor and SNMP Custom Library sensor

§ https://www.paessler.com/support/videos-and-webinars/videos/snmp-custom-and-library-sensor

2041
7.8.163 SNMP Custom Advanced Sensor
The SNMP Custom Advanced sensor monitors numeric values returned for object identifiers (OID) via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The SNMP Library sensor 2258 automatically creates SNMP Custom Advanced sensors when the
Management Information Base (MIB) file that you import contains single values.

SNMP Custom Advanced Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2048 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Aanpasbaar Geavanceerd

§ French: SNMP personnalisé avancé

§ German: SNMP (Benutzerdef. erweitert)

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: SNMP (customizado / avançado)

§ Russian: До п о лн ительн ы е п о льзо вательские п арам етры SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

2042
§ Spanish: SNMP (personalizado / avanzado)

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?

OID Settings

Setting Description

§ Delta (counter): Counter values. PRTG calculates the difference

between the last and the current value. PRTG additionally divides the
delta value by a time period to indicate a speed value.
This mode only works if the difference between the last and the
current value is positive and increases with each scanning interval.
This mode does not support negative values and decreasing values.
Absolute (float) and Delta (counter) are not compatible with the unit
Lookup.

Channel #2 - #10 You can define up to 10 channels. You must define at least one data
channel, so you see all available settings for Channel #1. Specify how to
handle all other possible channels:
§ Disable: Do not create this channel.

§ Enable: Create this channel. Define further settings below.

It is not possible to enable or disable channels after sensor creation.

2043
Basic Sensor Settings
Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpcustomsensor

§ snmpcustomadvanced

2044
OID Settings

OID Settings

Setting Description

Channel #x Name Enter a name for the channel in which the sensor shows the results at the
OID. Enter a string.

Channel #x OID Enter the OID of the SNMP object from which you want to receive numeric
data.
Most OIDs begin with 1.3.6.1. However, OIDs that start with 1.0, or
1.1, or 1.2 are also allowed. If you want to entirely disable the
validation of your entry, add the string norfccheck: to the beginning of the
OID, for example, norfccheck:2.0.0.0.1.

Channel #x Value Type Shows the value type of the numeric data that this sensor receives from
the OID.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel #x Unit Define the unit of the numeric data that this sensor receives from the OID:
§ BytesBandwidth

§ BytesMemory

§ BytesDisk

§ Temperature

§ Percent

§ TimeResponse

§ TimeSeconds

§ TimeHours

§ Count

§ CPU

2045
Setting Description

§ BytesFile

§ SpeedDisk

§ SpeedNet

§ Custom

§ Lookup

For more information about the available units, see section Custom
Sensors 3501 .
To use lookups 3541 with this channel, select Lookup and define the
lookup file in Channel #x Lookup. Do not use Custom if you use
lookups with this sensor.

You cannot use the unit Lookup if you select the value type Delta
(counter) or Absolute (float). You are not able to create the sensor in
this case.

Channel #x Custom Unit This setting is only visible if you select the channel unit Custom above.
Define a unit for the channel value. Enter a string.

Channel #x Lookup This setting is only visible if you select the channel unit Lookup above.
Select a lookup 3541 file that you want to use with this channel.

Channel #2 - #10 Shows if the channel is enabled or disabled. If you enabled a channel, you
can define the settings of the channel as described above.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2046
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2047
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Value] The numeric value for a specified OID (up to 10 OIDs are possible) that
refers to a specific SNMP device

More
Knowledge Base

How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/903

What security features does PRTG include?

2048
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2049
7.8.164 SNMP Custom String Sensor
The SNMP Custom String sensor monitors a string returned by a specific object identifier (OID) via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). It can check for keywords. If you want to set limits to
the channel value, you can also extract a numeric value contained in the string.

In the sensor message, the sensor shows the string that you search 2053 for and the reason for the
Warning or Down status 186 .

The SNMP Library sensor 2258 automatically creates SNMP Custom String sensors when the
Management Information Base (MIB) file that you import contains string values.

SNMP Custom String Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2059 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Aangepaste Tekenreeks

§ French: Chaîne personnalisée (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP-Zeichenfolge

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Sequência de caracteres (customizado) (SNMP)

§ Russian: SNMP: стро ка о твета

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Cadena (personalizado) (SNMP)

2050
Remarks
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.
§ For an example, see section Number Extraction with Regular Expression 2058

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2051
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ snmpcustomstringsensor

OID Settings

Setting Description

OID Enter the OID of the SNMP object that you want to receive a string from.
Most OIDs begin with 1.3.6.1. However, OIDs that start with 1.0, or
1.1, or 1.2 are also allowed. If you want to entirely disable the
validation of your entry, add the string norfccheck: to the beginning of the
OID, for example, norfccheck:2.0.0.0.1.

Maximum String Length Define the maximum length of the string that PRTG receives from the
SNMP object at the OID. If the string is longer than this value, the sensor
shows the Down status. Enter an integer or leave the field empty.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

2052
Setting Description

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

Keyword Search

Keyw ord Search

Setting Description

Response Must Include Define the search string that must be part of the data that PRTG receives
(Down Status if Not from the SNMP object at the OID. You can enter a simple string in plain
Included) text or a regular expression (regex) 3552 .
The search string must be case sensitive.
If the data does not include the search pattern, the sensor shows the
Down status.

2053
Setting Description

Search Method Define the method with which you want to provide the search string.
§ Simple string search: Search for a simple string in plain text.
The characters * and ? work as placeholders. * stands for no
number or any number of characters and ? stands for exactly one
character. You cannot change this behavior. The literal search for these
characters is only possible with a regex.
§ Regular expression: Search with a regex.

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex.

For more details, see section Regular Expressions 3552 .

Response Must Not Define the search string that must not be part of the data that PRTG
Include (Down Status if receives form the SNMP object at the OID. You can enter a simple string
Included) in plain text or a regex.
The search string must be case sensitive.
If the data does include the search pattern, the sensor shows the
Down status.

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex.

For more details, see section Regular Expressions 3552 .

Response Must Include Define the search string that must be part of the data that PRTG receives
(Warning Status If Not from the SNMP object at the OID. You can enter a simple string in plain
Included) text or a regex.
The search string must be case sensitive.
If the data does not include the search pattern, the sensor shows the
Warning status.

2054
Setting Description

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex.

For more details, see section Regular Expressions 3552 .

Response Must Not Define the search string that must not be part of the data that PRTG
Include (Warning Status receives form the SNMP object at the OID. You can enter a simple string
If Included) in plain text or a regex.
The search string must be case sensitive.
If the data does include the search pattern, the sensor shows the
Warning status.

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex.

For more details, see section Regular Expressions 3552 .

Extended Processing

Setting Description

Interpret Result As Define the type of the received string:

§ String (default): Handle the result as a common string.

§ Bytes in hexadecimal notation: Handle the result as bytes in

hexadecimal notation. For example, select this option if you monitor
MAC addresses.

2055
Setting Description

§ Bytes in decimal notation: Handle the result as bytes in decimal

notation. For example, select this option if you monitor IP addresses.

Numeric Value Extraction Define if you want to filter out a numeric value from the received string:
§ Do not use extraction: Do not extract a float value. Use the result as a
string value.
§ Use a regular expression for extraction: Use a regular expression
(regex) to identify a numeric value in the string and to convert it to a
float value to use it, for example, with channel limits. Define below. See
also the example 2058 .
For more information, see section Channel Settings 3052 .

Regular Expression This setting is only visible if you select Use a regular expression for
extraction above. Enter a regular expression to identify the numeric value
that you want to extract from the string returned by the SNMP object at
the specified OID. You can use capturing groups.
Make sure that the expression only returns numbers, including the
decimal and thousands separators.

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex.

For more details, see section Regular Expressions 3552 .

Index of Capturing Group This setting is only visible if you select Use a regular expression for
extraction above. If your regex uses capturing groups, specify which one
captures the number. Enter an integer or leave the field empty.

Decimal Separator This setting is only visible if you select Use a regular expression for
extraction above. Define the character for the decimal separator of the
number. Enter a string or leave the field empty.

Thousands Separator This setting is only visible if you select Use a regular expression for
extraction above. Define the character for the thousands separator of the
number. Enter a string or leave the field empty.

Sensor Display

2056
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2057
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Number Extraction with Regular Expression

If you want to extract a number in the response string via a regex, note that the index for captures in
this sensor is based on 1 (not on 0). Furthermore, capturing groups are not automatically created.
The example below illustrates this issue.

Consider the following string as returned by a request for CPU usage:

5 Sec (3.49%), 1 Min (3.555%), 5 Min (3.90%)

Assuming you would like to filter for the number 3.555, this is the percentage in the second parentheses.
Enter the following regex in the Regular Expression field:
(\d+\.\d+).*?(\d+\.\d+).*?(\d+\.\d+)

As Index of Capturing Group, enter 3. This extracts the desired number 3.555.

The index must be 3 in this case because the capturing groups here are the following:

§ Group 1 contains 3.49%), 1 Min (3.555), 5 Min (3.90

§ Group 2 contains 3.49

§ Group 3 contains 3.555

§ Group 4 contains 3.90

Keep this note about index and capturing groups in mind when using number extraction.

2058
It is not possible to match an empty string with the PRTG regex sensor search.

PRTG supports Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) regex. For more details, see section
Regular Expressions 3552 .

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Extracted Value The value extracted from the string (optional)

Response Time The response time in msec

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/903

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2059
7.8.165 SNMP Custom String Lookup Sensor
The SNMP Custom String Lookup sensor monitors a string that a specific object identifier (OID) returns
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). It can map the string directly to a sensor
status 186 by using a defined lookup file 3541 .

Basically, this sensor does a "reverse lookup". You need to define all potential return strings in the
lookup file as text values, each in one lookup entry. Graphs and data tables show the value to which
the string is mapped, usually an integer (lookup type 3549 SingleInt). For more information, see section
Example 2065 .

SNMP Custom String Lookup Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2066 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Aangepaste Tekst Lookup

§ French: Requête de chaîne personnalisée (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP-Zeichenfolge mit Lookup

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Pesquisa da sequência de caracteres (customizado) (SNMP)

§ Russian: П о дстан о вка п о льзо вательско й стро ки п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Búsqueda de cadena (personalizado) (SNMP)

2060
Remarks
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ See section Example 2065 for a sample lookup definition for this sensor.
§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?

OID Settings

Setting Description

Channel Name Enter a name for the channel in which the sensor shows the results for the
OID. Enter a string.
You can change this value later in the channel settings 3052 of this
sensor.

Lookup Select a lookup file that is available in the \lookups\custom subfolder of

the PRTG program directory 3579 on the probe system.
The lookup file must contain all potential strings that the OID can
return.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2061
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpcustomsensor

2062
OID Settings

OID Settings

Setting Description

Lookup Shows the lookup file that this sensor uses.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

Sensor Display

2063
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2064
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Example
You must provide all possible return strings for this sensor in one lookup file. For example, consider
an OID that can return one of the three strings Good, Deficient, or Bad. Then you must define a
lookup file 3541 for this sensor that contains all these possible string values as text, each text value in one
lookup entry:

2065
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<ValueLookup id="mylookupfile" desiredValue="0"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="PaeValueLookup.xsd">
<Lookups>
<SingleInt state="Ok" value="0">
Good
</SingleInt>
<SingleInt state="Warning" value="1">
Deficient
</SingleInt>
<SingleInt state="Error" value="2">
Bad
</SingleInt>
</Lookups>
</ValueLookup>

If a retrieved string matches one of the text values, the sensor maps it into the defined integer ("reverse
lookup") that is shown, for example, in data graphs. Depending on the integer, the sensor shows the
respective status and converts the integer back to the original string to show it as a channel value. If the
OID returns a string that the lookup definition does not contain, the sensor shows the Down status 186
with a corresponding error message.

For example, you create an SNMP Custom String Lookup sensor, apply the example lookup definition
from above (store it into the \lookups\custom subfolder of the PRTG program directory), and the specified
OID returns the string Good. Then the sensor maps the string Good to the integer 0 that is shown in the
live graph of the sensor, for example. According to the status definition state="Ok", the sensor status is
Up in this case. The integer 0 is converted back to the string Good, which is shown as the channel value.

The string match is not case sensitive.

Use the lookup type SingleInt for this sensor. BitFields and ranges are not supported.

If you imported an SNMP library 2265 (this is an .oidlib file) that contains lookups 3541 (you can see this
in section Lookup in the MIB Importer), you can define your own sensor states for returning values.
Use the lookupname of the imported SNMP library as id parameter in a custom lookup definition. This
overrides the lookups that an .oidlib file might contain with your own status definitions. See section
Define Lookups 3547 for details about this mechanism.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2066
Channel Description

[Value] The retrieved string value and its status, as defined in the corresponding
lookup file
This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/903

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

PAESSLER TOOLS

MIB Importer
§ https://www.paessler.com/tools/mibimporter

2067
7.8.166 SNMP Custom Table Sensor
The SNMP Custom Table sensor monitors entries from a table that is provided via the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). You can create one new sensor per table row. For each sensor, you can
define up to ten channels. Each channel shows the value of one defined table column.

The SNMP Library sensor 2258 automatically creates SNMP Custom Table sensors when the
Management Information Base (MIB) file that you import contains tables.

SNMP Custom Table Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2076 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Aangepaste Tabel

§ French: Table personnalisée (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP (Benutzerdef. Tabelle)

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Tabela (customizada) (SNMP)

§ Russian: Н естан дартн ая таблица SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Tabla (personalizado) (SNMP)

2068
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?

§ See the Knowledge Base: What can I monitor with the SNMP Custom Table sensor?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SNMP Table

Setting Description

Table OID Enter the object identifier (OID) of the SNMP table that you want to
monitor. The OID must directly point to an object that represents an
SNMP table. PRTG creates one SNMP Custom Table sensor for each
table row that you select.
If you do not enter an OID, you cannot proceed with channel creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a meaningful name to identify the sensor. You can use the
placeholders [tablename] and [rowidentifier]. PRTG replaces them with the
name of the table and the identifying value of the chosen row respectively.
You can select the column that provides the row identifier in the
Identification Column option below.
You can also enter a valid OID that is part of a different SNMP table, for
example, [1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2], to query information that the current table
does not contain. PRTG adds the same index as in the original table to
the OID.

Table Specific

2069
Setting Description

Table The sensor shows you the table that the OID returns. Select the table
rows that contain the data that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each table row that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Identification Column Define the identification column for the sensors that you want to create.
The sensors use this column to uniquely identify each table row.
We recommend that you use a unique identification column because
it allows the sensors to keep track of changing indexes.
The value of the column that you select as identification column
replaces the [rowidentifier] in the sensor name. This lets you
distinguish sensors that you create for the same SNMP table.

Channel #2 - #10 You can create up to 10 different channels for this sensor. You must
define at least one data channel, so you already see all available settings
for Channel #1. Additionally, you can define Channel #2 up to Channel
#10. To do so, choose between:
§ Disable: Do not create this channel.

§ Enable: Create this channel. Define further settings below.

It is not possible to enable or disable channels after sensor creation.

All channels that you define during the creation of an SNMP
Custom Table sensor are the same for all sensors for each table
row.

§ Delta (counter): Counter values. PRTG calculates the difference

between the last and the current value. PRTG additionally divides the
delta value by a time period to indicate a speed value.
This mode only works if the difference between the last and the
current value is positive and increases with each scanning interval.
This mode does not support negative values and decreasing values.
Absolute (float) and Delta (counter) are not compatible with the unit
Lookup.

2070
Setting Description

See below 2072 for other channel settings that you can also change
after sensor creation.
This sensor monitors numeric values only. Make sure that you do not
select columns that return strings because they lead to the Down
status 186 . For example, if you monitor an ifTable, we recommend that you
do not select an ifDescr column because this results in an error.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2071
Setting Description

§ snmpcustomsensor

§ snmpcustomtable

SNMP Table

Setting Description

Table OID Shows the OID of the SNMP table that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Table Specific

2072
Setting Description

Identifier This is the value of the column that you selected as the Identification
Column during sensor creation. PRTG also displays it in the sensor name
to distinguish it from other sensors you created for the same table with
other table rows. You can change the identifier if you want to.

Identification Column Shows the table column that you chose as identification column.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel #x Name Enter a name for the channel in which the sensor shows the desired
result. Enter a string.

Channel #x Column Select the table column that, together with the table row, points to the
value that you want to monitor in this channel. You can choose between
the available columns of the table that you monitor.

Channel #x Value Type Shows the value type of the data that this sensor receives in this channel.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel #x Unit Define the unit of the data that this sensor receives in this channel:
§ BytesBandwidth

§ BytesMemory

§ BytesDisk

§ Temperature

§ Percent

§ TimeResponse

§ TimeSeconds

§ TimeHours

§ Count

§ CPU

§ BytesFile

§ SpeedDisk

§ SpeedNet

§ Custom

§ Lookup

For more information about the available units, see section Custom
Sensors 3501 .

2073
Setting Description

To use lookups 3541 with this channel, select Lookup and define the
lookup file in Channel #x Lookup. Do not use Custom if you use
lookups with this sensor.

You cannot use the unit Lookup if you select the value type Delta
(counter) or Absolute (float). You are not able to create the sensor in
this case.

Channel #x Custom Unit This setting is only visible if you select the channel unit Custom above.
Define a unit for the channel value. Enter a string.

Channel #x Lookup This setting is only visible if you select the channel unit Lookup above.
Select a lookup 3541 file that you want to use with this channel.

Channel #2 - #10 Shows if the channel is enabled or disabled.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2074
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2075
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Value] The returned numeric values in up to ten channels per table row

More
Knowledge Base

How do I find out which OID I need for an SNMP Custom sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/903

What can I monitor with the SNMP Custom Table sensor?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/68539

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

Can I monitor UPS systems complying with the UPS MIB (RFC-1628) with PRTG?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/72117

2076
7.8.167 SNMP Dell EqualLogic Logical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Dell EqualLogic Logical Disk sensor monitors a volume of a Dell EqualLogic storage system
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Dell EqualLogic Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2082 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Logische Schijf

§ French: Dell EqualLogic disque logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Logischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Spanish: Disco lógico Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2077
§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell EqualLogic Specific

Setting Description

Volumes Select the volumes that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor
for each volume that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2078
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ dellequallogic

§ snmpdell

§ dell

Dell EqualLogic Specific

Setting Description

Volumes Shows the volume that this sensor monitors.

2079
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Member ID Shows the member ID of the volume that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Volume ID Shows the ID of the volume that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Volume Description Shows the description of the volume that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2080
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2081
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Availability The availability status

§ Up status 186 : Available
§ Down status: Missing Members

2082
Channel Description

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Average Read Latency The average read latency in milliseconds (msec)

Average Write Latency The average write latency in msec

Connections The number of connections

Data Read The data read speed in bytes per second

Data Written The data write speed in bytes per second

Operations Status The operations status:

§ Up status: Available

§ Warning status: Available But No New Connections

§ Down status: Not Available, Not Available Due To, Not Available Due To
Internal Error, Not Available Due To Lost Cached Blocks, Not Available
Due To Members Offline, Not Available Due To Missing Pages, Not
Available Due To No Space For Auto Grow, Not Available Due To Snap
Reserve Met, Not Available Due To Thin Max Growth Met,

Read Ops The number of disk read operations per second

Write Ops The number of disk write operations per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2083
7.8.168 SNMP Dell EqualLogic Member Health Sensor
The SNMP Dell EqualLogic Member Health sensor monitors the health of an array member of an
EqualLogic storage system via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Dell EqualLogic Member Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2090 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Lid Gezondheid

§ French: Dell EqualLogic état du composant (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Member-Zustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do membro Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

2084
§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть элем ен та Dell EqualLogic п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Spanish: Salud de miembro Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor works with SNMP v2c and SNMP v3. It does not support SNMP v1. Make sure that you
set the correct SNMP Version in the settings 548 of the parent device or inherit it from objects higher in
the hierarchy 140 .

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell EqualLogic Specific

Setting Description

Array Member Select the array members that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each array member that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2085
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ dellequallogic

§ snmpdell

§ dell

2086
Dell EqualLogic Specific

Dell EqualLogic Specific

Setting Description

Array Member Shows the name of the member that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Group ID Shows the group ID of the member that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Member ID Shows the ID of the group member that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2087
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2088
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2089
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Average Read Latency The average read latency in milliseconds (msec)

Average Read Latency The average write latency in msec

Data Read The data read speed in bytes per second

Data Written The data write speed in bytes per second

Fan Power Cooling The power of the cooling module fan in revolutions per minute (RPM)
Module [#] Fan [#]

Member Health Status The member health status

§ Up status 186 : Normal
§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Critical, Unknown

Member Status The member status

§ Up status 186 : Online
§ Warning status: Vacated, Vacating

§ Down status: Offline

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Number of Spares The number of spare drives

Power Supply Power The status of the power supply cooling module
Cooling Module [#]
§ Up status: On and Operating

§ Down status: Failed or No Data, No AC Power

RAID Status The status of the RAID

§ Up status: Expanding, Mirroring, Ok, Verifying

2090
Channel Description

§ Warning status: Degraded, Reconstructing

§ Down status: Catastrophic Loss, Failed

Storage Free % The free storage in percent

Temperature Control The control module temperature

Module [#] [Module]

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2091
7.8.169 SNMP Dell EqualLogic Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Dell EqualLogic Physical Disk sensor monitors a disk in a Dell EqualLogic storage system
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Dell EqualLogic Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2099 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Fysieke Schijf

§ French: Dell EqualLogic disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell EqualLogic Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Portuguese: Disco físico Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск Dell EqualLogic п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell EqualLogic

§ Spanish: Disco físico Dell EqualLogic (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2092
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell EqualLogic Specific

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2093
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ dellequallogic

§ snmpdell

§ dell

Dell EqualLogic Specific

2094
Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Group ID Shows the group ID of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Member ID Shows the group member ID of the physical disk that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Disk Slot Shows the slot number of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Serial Number Shows the serial number of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Manufactured Shows the production date of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
If this field is empty, the physical disk does not provide information about
the date (this depends on the manufacturer).
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2095
Setting Description

are available for this sensor.

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a
channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:

§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2096
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

Setting Description

Schedule Select a schedule from the list. You can use schedules to monitor during
a certain time span (days or hours) every week. Choose from:
§ None

§ Saturdays

§ Sundays

§ Weekdays

§ Weekdays Eight-To-Eight (08:00 - 20:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (17:00 - 09:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (20:00 - 08:00)

§ Weekdays Nine-To-Five (09:00 - 17:00)

§ Weekends

You can create schedules, edit schedules, or pause monitoring for a

specific time span. For more information, see section Schedules 3215 .

Maintenance Window Select if you want to set up a one-time maintenance window. During a
maintenance window, monitoring stops for the selected object and all child
objects. They show the Paused status instead. Choose between:
§ Do not set up a one-time maintenance window: Do not set up a one-
time maintenance window. Monitoring is always active.
§ Set up a one-time maintenance window: Set up a one-time maintenance
window and pause monitoring. You can define a time span for the pause
below.
To terminate an active maintenance window before the defined end
date, change the time entry in Maintenance Ends to a date in the
past.

Maintenance Begins This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the start date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

2097
Setting Description

Maintenance Ends This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the end date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

Dependency Type Select a dependency type. You can use dependencies to pause
monitoring for an object depending on the status of a different object. You
can choose from:
§ Use parent: Use the dependency type of the parent object.

§ Select a sensor: Use the dependency type of the parent object.

Additionally, pause the current object if a specific sensor is in the Down
status or in the Paused status because of another dependency.
§ Master sensor for parent: Make this sensor the master object for its
parent device. The sensor influences the behavior of its parent device: If
the sensor is in the Down status, the device is paused. For example, it
is a good idea to make a Ping sensor the master object for its parent
device to pause monitoring for all other sensors on the device in case
the device cannot even be pinged. Additionally, the sensor is paused if
the parent group is paused by another dependency.
To test your dependencies 3096 , select Simulate Error Status from the
context menu of an object that other objects depend on. A few
seconds later, all dependent objects are paused. You can check all
dependencies under Devices | Dependencies in the main menu bar.

Dependency This setting is only visible if you enable Select a sensor above. Click
and use the object selector 225 to select a sensor on which the current
object will depend.

Dependency Delay (Sec.) This setting is only visible if you select Select a sensor above. Define a
time span in seconds for the dependency delay.
After the master sensor for this dependency returns to the Up status,
PRTG additionally delays the monitoring of the dependent objects by the
time span you define. This can prevent false alarms, for example, after a
server restart or to give systems more time for all services to start. Enter
an integer.
This setting is not available if you set this sensor to Use parent or to
be the Master sensor for parent. In this case, define delays in the
parent device settings 535 or in its parent group settings 479 .

2098
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Bytes Read The bytes read per second

Bytes Written The bytes written per second

2099
Channel Description

Disk Status The health status of the disk

§ Up status 186 : Online, Spare
§ Warning status: Alt-Sig, History Of Failures, Replacement

§ Down status: Encrypted, Failed, Not Approved, Offline, Preempt Failed,

Too Small, Unhealthy, Unsupported Version
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Failed Transfers The number of failed transfers per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2100
7.8.170 SNMP Dell Hardware Sensor
The SNMP Dell Hardware sensor monitors performance counters on a Dell hardware device via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The data that you can monitor with this sensor depends on the available performance counters on
the target system.

The SNMP Dell Hardware sensor does not appear as a running sensor, instead it is created as an
SNMP Custom Advanced sensor 2042 or an SNMP Custom Table sensor 2068 .

SNMP Dell Hardw are Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2106 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Dell Hardware

§ French: Dell matériel (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell Hardware

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell

§ Portuguese: Hardware Dell (SNMP)

§ Russian: О бо рудо ван ие Dell п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell

§ Spanish: Hardware Dell (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires 2102 that the Dell OpenManage Server Administrator is installed on the monitored
Dell device.

2101
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: What do I need to monitor Dell servers?

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Dell OpenManage Server This sensor needs the Dell OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA)
Administrator tool to be installed on the target device to monitor it. Make sure that you
enable SNMP in the OMSA.
For details, see the Knowledge Base: What do I need to monitor Dell
servers?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell Hardware Specific

Sensor Display

2104
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2105
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Performance Counter] The value returned by a specific Dell hardware object identifier (OID), for
example
§ Data about the system management software

§ Data about system status

§ Information about chassis and BIOS

§ Various hardware parameters

§ Other valuable data

2106
More
Knowledge Base

What do I need to monitor Dell servers?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/45333

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2107
7.8.171 SNMP Dell PowerEdge Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Dell PowerEdge Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in a Dell PowerEdge server
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Dell Pow erEdge Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2114 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP-Dell PowerEdge Fysieke Schijf

§ French: Dell PowerEdge disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell PowerEdge Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell PowerEdge

§ Portuguese: Disco físico Dell PowerEdge (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск Dell PowerEdge п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell PowerEdge

§ Spanish: Disco físico Dell PowerEdge (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requiresthat Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) 7 or the Dell
2109

OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) are installed on the monitored server.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2108
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ See the Knowledge Base: What do I need to monitor Dell servers?

§ See the Knowledge Base: I can't add Dell PowerEdge sensors to PRTG. What can I do?

§ See the Knowledge Base: My Dell PowerEdge sensor fails to validate disks and I can't add it. What
can I do?

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Dell OpenManage Server This sensor needs the Dell OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA)
Administrator or iDRAC 7 tool to be installed on the target device to monitor it. Make sure that you
enable SNMP in the OMSA.
For details, see the Knowledge Base: What do I need to monitor Dell
servers?
You can also monitor Dell PowerEdge servers with this sensor via
iDRAC 7.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell PowerEdge Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2109
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdellphysicaldisksensor

§ physicaldisk

§ snmpdell

§ dell

2110
Dell PowerEdge Physical Disk Settings

Dell Pow erEdge Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Data Source Shows the interface that PRTG uses to get monitoring data. This is either
Dell OMSA or iDRAC.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2111
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2112
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2113
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Component Status The component status

§ Up status 186 : Ok
§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical, Non Recoverable, Other, Unknown

Disk State The disk state

§ Up status: Non-Raid, Online, Ready

§ Warning status: Foreign

§ Down status: Blocked, Critical, Failed, Non Recoverable, Other,

Removed, Unknown
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Roll Up Status The roll up status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical, Non Recoverable, Other, Unknown

S.M.A.R.T. Warning The Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.)

status warning
§ Up status: No

§ Down status: Yes

More
Knowledge Base

What do I need to monitor Dell servers?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/45333

I can't add Dell PowerEdge sensors to PRTG. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/68040

2114
My Dell PowerEdge sensor fails to validate disks and I can't add it. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61784

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2115
7.8.172 SNMP Dell PowerEdge System Health Sensor
The SNMP Dell PowerEdge System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Dell PowerEdge
server via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Dell Pow erEdge System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2122 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Dell PowerEdge Systeem Status

§ French: Dell PowerEdge état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Dell PowerEdge Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Dell PowerEdge

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Dell PowerEdge (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы Dell PowerEdge п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Dell PowerEdge

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Dell PowerEdge (SNMP)

2116
Remarks
§ This sensor requiresthat Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) 7 or the Dell
2117

OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) are installed on the monitored server.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ See the Knowledge Base: Why does my Dell PowerEdge System Health sensor show a power unit
status error after iDRAC update?
§ See the Knowledge Base: What do I need to monitor Dell servers?

§ See the Knowledge Base: I can't add Dell PowerEdge sensors to PRTG. What can I do?

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Dell PowerEdge System Health Specific

Setting Description

Chassis Select the chassis that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each chassis that you select.

2117
Setting Description

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdellsystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

2118
Setting Description

§ snmpdell

§ dell

Dell PowerEdge System Health Specific

Dell Pow erEdge System Health Specific

Setting Description

Chassis Shows the chassis that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel Mask Shows the channel mask that describes which channels are available.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Data Source Shows the interface that PRTG uses to get monitoring data. This is either
Dell OMSA or iDRAC.

2119
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2120
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2121
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical, Non Recoverable, Other, Unknown

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Intrusion Status The intrusion status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical, Non Recoverable, Other, Unknown

Memory Device Status The memory device status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical, Non Recoverable, Other, Unknown

Power Supply Status The power supply status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Non Critical

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2124
7.8.173 SNMP Disk Free Sensor
The SNMP Disk Free sensor monitors the free disk space on a logical disk via the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Disk Free Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2130 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP vrije schijf ruimte

§ French: Espace disponible du disque (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Datenträgerspeicher

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Disco livre (SNMP)

§ Russian: Сво бо дн о е п ро стран ство п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Espacio libre en disco (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor uses more generic object identifier (OID) values compared to the SNMP Linux Disk Free
sensor 2269 .
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2125
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Disk Free Settings

Setting Description

Disk Select the disks that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each disk that you select.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2126
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdiskfreesensor

§ diskspacesensor

§ diskfree

§ snmp

Disk Free Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the name of the disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. We strongly

recommend that you only change it if the Paessler support team
explicitly asks you to do so. Wrong usage can result in incorrect
monitoring data.

2127
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2128
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2129
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Free Bytes The free space in bytes

Free Space The free space in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Total The total space in bytes

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

2130
My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2131
7.8.174 SNMP Fujitsu System Health v2 Sensor
The SNMP Fujitsu System Health v2 sensor monitors the status of a Fujitsu PRIMERGY server via the
integrated Remote Management Controller (iRMC) and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The sensor might also work on other Fujitsu devices that have an iRMC available like PRIMEQUEST
servers, some storage systems of the ETERNUS product line, and CELSIUS workstations in racks.

SNMP Fujitsu System Health v2 Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2138 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Fujitsu System Health v2

§ French: Fujitsu état du système v2 (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Fujitsu Systemzustand v2

§ Japanese: SNMP Fujitsu v2

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Fujitsu (SNMP) v2

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы Fujitsu п о SNMP, версия 2

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Fujitsu 2

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Fujitsu (SNMP) v2

2132
Remarks
§ Use an iRMC interface as parent device for this sensor.

§ Make sure that you enable SNMP in the iRMC via ServerView.

§ This sensor does not support SNMPv1.

§ As of iRMC S5, additional counters for physical disks and logical disks are supported.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ This sensor supersedes the deprecated SNMP Fujitsu System Health sensor.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

System Specific

Setting Description

Measurements Select the measurements that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measurement that you select.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2133
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpfujitsusystemhealthsensor

§ snmp

§ systemhealth

§ fujitsu

§ irmc

2134
System Specific

System Specific

Setting Description

Measurement Shows the type of measurement that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Version Shows the version of the sensor definition that was used to create this
sensor.

Identifier Shows the value that the sensor uses to find the component in the OID
table.
The identifier has the following format: RowIndex | Unique |
Measurement. For example, 1.1|BATT 3.0V|Voltage.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

OID Index Shows the OID table index that this sensor uses.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Debug Options

2135
Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file names are
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt and Result of Sensor [ID].log. This setting
is for debugging purposes. PRTG overwrites these files with each
scanning interval.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2136
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2137
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

§ Unknown status: Unknown

Temperature Status The temperature status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Warning

2139
Channel Description

§ Down status: Error

§ Unknown status: Unknown

Voltage Status The voltage status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error

§ Unknown status: Unknown

The sensor can also show CPU speed and core count, fan speed, number of correctable and
uncorrectable errors of the memory module, service processor battery status, condition of the power
supply, power limit status, and power consumption.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2140
7.8.175 SNMP Hardware Status Sensor
The SNMP Hardware Status sensor monitors the status of a server's hardware component via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Hardw are Status Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2146 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Hardware Status

§ French: Statut matériel (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Hardwarezustand

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Status do hardware (SNMP)

§ Russian: Статус о бо рудо ван ия п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Estado de hardware (SNMP)

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2141
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Hardware Specific

Setting Description

Hardware Components Select the hardware components that you want to monitor. PRTG creates
one sensor for each hardware component that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Errors The number of errors per second

Status The status of the hardware component

§ Up status 186 : Running
§ Warning status: Warning, Testing

§ Down status: Down, Unknown

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2146
7.8.176 SNMP HP LaserJet Hardware Sensor
The SNMP HP LaserJet Hardware sensor monitors performance counters on an HP LaserJet hardware
device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The SNMP HP LaserJet Hardware sensor does not appear as a running sensor, instead it is created
as an SNMP Custom Advanced sensor 2042 .

SNMP HP LaserJet Hardw are Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2152 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HP LaserJet Hardware

§ French: HP LaserJet matériel (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HP LaserJet Hardware

§ Japanese: SNMP HP LaserJet

§ Portuguese: Hardware HP LaserJet (SNMP)

§ Russian: О бо рудо ван ие HP LaserJet п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HP LaserJet

§ Spanish: Hardware HP LaserJet (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2147
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HP LaserJet Specific

Setting Description

Category Select the categories that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one SNMP
Custom Advanced sensor including all performance counters that you
select.
The following performance counters for your printer are available:
§ Toner/Status

§ Paper/Status

§ Jam/Status

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2148
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ hplaserjet

HP LaserJet Specific

Setting Description

Interface Shows the name of the category (performance counter) that this sensor
monitors.

2149
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2150
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2151
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Jam The paper jam status

§ Up status 186 : No Jam Detected
§ Down status: Paper Jam Detected

Paper The paper status

§ Up status: Paper Okay

§ Down status: Manual Paper Feed Required, Out Of Paper Or No

Cassette Loaded

Toner The toner status

§ Up status: Toner Okay

§ Warning status: Toner Low

§ Down status: No Toner Cartridge Loaded

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2152
7.8.177 SNMP HPE BladeSystem Blade Sensor
The SNMP HPE BladeSystem Blade sensor monitors the status of an HPE BladeSystem via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE BladeSystem Blade Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2158 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE BladeSystem Blade

§ French: HPE BladeSystem serveur Blade (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE BladeSystem Blade

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE BladeSystem

§ Portuguese: Blade HPE BladeSystem (SNMP)

§ Russian: Блейд-м о дуль HPE BladeSystem п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE BladeSystem

§ Spanish: Blade HPE BladeSystem (SNMP)

Remarks
§ Make sure that you add this sensor to a device whose IP address or Domain Name System (DNS)
name points to the HPE BladeSystem Enclosure hosting the Onboard Administrator.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2153
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HPE BladeSystem Specific

Setting Description

Server Blades Select the blades that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each server blade that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2154
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmp

§ hpe

§ blade

§ bladesystem

HPE BladeSystem Specific

Setting Description

Server Blades Shows the server blade that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2155
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2156
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2157
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Blade Status The blade status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Power Status The power status

§ Up status: On, Rebooting

§ Warning status: Off, Power Stagged Off, Unknown

§ Unknown status: Other

2158
More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2159
7.8.178 SNMP HPE BladeSystem Enclosure System Health Sensor
The SNMP HPE BladeSystem Enclosure System Health sensor monitors the system health of an HPE
BladeSystem device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE BladeSystem Enclosure System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2164 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE BladeSystem Behuizing Systeem Gesteldheid

§ French: HPE BladeSystem Enclosure état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE BladeSystem Enclosure Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE BladeSystem

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema de gabinete HPE BladeSystem (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы ко рп уса HPE BladeSystem п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE BladeSystem

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema de gabinete HPE BladeSystem (SNMP)

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2160
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmp

2161
Setting Description

§ hpe

§ blade

§ bladesystem

§ systemhealth

§ health

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2162
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2163
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

2164
Channel Description

Enclosure Condition The enclosure condition

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Enclosure Manager The enclosure manager condition

Condition
§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded, Unknown

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2165
7.8.179 SNMP HPE ProLiant Logical Disk Sensor
The SNMP HPE ProLiant Logical Disk sensor monitors a logical disk in an HPE server via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE ProLiant Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2172 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE ProLiant Logische Schijf

§ French: HPE ProLiant disque logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE ProLiant Logischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск HPE ProLiant п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Spanish: Disco lógico HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

Remarks
§ For Gen9 servers or earlier: This sensor requires HPE Insight Management Agents and HPE Insight
Management WBEM Providers to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: This sensor requires HPE Agentless Management and the HPE Agentless
Management Service to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: Use the HPE Integrated Lights Out (iLO) interface as the parent device for this
sensor.

2166
§ This sensor supports monitoring iLO as of iLO version 3. We recommend that you use iLO 4 or later.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

HPE system For Gen9 servers or earlier, this sensor needs a specific HPE system
management tools management tool to be installed on the target device to report data via
SNMP: HPE Insight Management Agents. To receive SNMP data from
redundant array of independent disks (RAID) controllers, you additionally
need HPE Insight Management Agents. For Gen10 servers, this sensor no
longer requires HPE system management tools. Instead, the sensor
needs the HPE Agentless Management Service to be installed on the
target device.
For more details and download links, see the Knowledge Base:
Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?
For Gen9 servers or earlier, some of the HPE object identifiers (OID)
that this sensor uses are only accessible via the iLO interface. If this
sensor throws an error that it cannot find "such device types", create a
device that points to the address of the HPE iLO interface (if available) and
add the sensor to this device. We recommend that you use the Agentless
Management feature with configured SNMP. You can set this up in the
iLO configuration interface under Administration | Management | SNMP
Settings. For Gen10 servers, use the HPE iLO interface as parent device
for this sensor.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HPE ProLiant Logical Disk Settings

2167
Setting Description

Disk Select the logical disks that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each logical disk that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2168
Setting Description

§ snmphpelogicaldisksensor

§ logicaldisk

§ snmphpe

§ hpe

HPE ProLiant Logical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the name of the disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

2169
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2170
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2171
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Completion The completion in percent

This is only important when the disk status is "Reconstructing" or
"Expanding" and illustrates the progress of this task.

Disk Status The disk status

§ Up status 186 : Expanding, Ok, Rebuilding
§ Warning status: Ready For Rebuild, Recovering, Unconfigurated

§ Down status: Bad Connect, Erasing, Failed, Multipath Access

Degraded, Not Available, Overheating, Queued For Expansion,
Shutdown, Wrong Drive,
§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/33133

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2172
7.8.180 SNMP HPE ProLiant Memory Controller Sensor
The SNMP HPE ProLiant Memory Controller sensor monitors a memory controller in an HPE server via
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE ProLiant Memory Controller Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2179 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE ProLiant Geheugencontroller

§ French: HPE ProLiant contrôleur de mémoire (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE ProLiant Speichercontroller

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Portuguese: Controlador de memória HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ко н тро ллер п ам яти HPE ProLiant п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Spanish: Controlador de memoria HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

2173
Remarks
§ For Gen9 servers or earlier: This sensor requires HPE Insight Management Agents and HPE Insight
Management WBEM Providers to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: This sensor requires HPE Agentless Management and the HPE Agentless
Management Service to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: Use the HPE Integrated Lights Out (iLO) interface as the parent device for this
sensor.

§ If modules are inserted at a later point, you must add this sensor anew.

§ This sensor supports monitoring iLO as of iLO version 3. We recommend that you use iLO 4 or later.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

2174
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HPE ProLiant Memory Controller Settings

Setting Description

Controllers Select the memory controllers that you want to monitor. PRTG creates
one sensor for each memory controller that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2175
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmphpememorycontrollersensor

§ memorycontroller

§ snmphpe

§ hpe

HPE ProLiant Memory Controller Settings

Setting Description

Controller Shows the name of the controller that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2176
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2177
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2178
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Controller Condition. The condition of the controller

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Controller Error Status The error status of the controller

§ Up status: Advanced Ecc, Lock Step, Memory Raid, Mirrored, No Error,
OnlineSpare
§ Down status: Bus Error, Config Error, Dimm Ecc Error, Lock Step Error,
Mirrored Dimm Error, Power Error, Raid Dimm Error, Unlock Error
§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

2179
Channel Description

Module [#] Condition The condition of the module

§ Up status: OK

§ Down status: Degraded, Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Module [#] Status The status of the module

§ Up status: Add, Good, Present

§ Warning status: Not Present, Upgrade

§ Down status: Bad Config, Degraded, Does Not Match, Missing, Not
Supported
§ Unknown status: Other

More
Knowledge Base

Which lookup values are supported by the SNMP HPE ProLiant Memory Controller sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/44803

Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/33133

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2180
7.8.181 SNMP HPE ProLiant Network Interface Sensor
The SNMP HPE ProLiant Network Interface sensor monitors a network interface in an HPE server via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE ProLiant Netw ork Interface Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2187 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE ProLiant Netwerkinterface

§ French: HPE ProLiant interface réseau (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE ProLiant Netzwerkschnittstelle

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Portuguese: Interface de rede HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

§ Russian: Сетево й ин терф ейс HPE ProLiant п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Spanish: Interfaz de red HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

2181
Remarks
§ For Gen9 servers or earlier: This sensor requires HPE Insight Management Agents and HPE Insight
Management WBEM Providers to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: This sensor requires HPE Agentless Management and the HPE Agentless
Management Service to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: Use the HPE Integrated Lights Out (iLO) interface as the parent device for this
sensor.

§ During sensor creation, the status of each available network interface is shown. If this status is Link
Failure, it is still possible to add a sensor for the respective interface. Though, most likely the sensor
for this interface does not work correctly. The error message in this case is "No Such Name (SNMP
error # 2)".
§ This sensor supports monitoring iLO as of iLO version 3. We recommend that you use iLO 4 or later.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

For more details and download links, see the Knowledge Base:
Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?
For Gen9 servers or earlier, some of the HPE object identifiers (OID)
that this sensor uses are only accessible via the iLO interface. If this
sensor throws an error that it cannot find "such device types", create a
device that points to the address of the HPE iLO interface (if available) and
add the sensor to this device. We recommend that you use the Agentless
Management feature with configured SNMP. You can set this up in the
iLO configuration interface under Administration | Management | SNMP
Settings. For Gen10 servers, use the HPE iLO interface as parent device
for this sensor.

2182
The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HPE ProLiant Network Interface Settings

Setting Description

Network Interfaces Select the network interfaces that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each interface that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
If this status is Link Failure, it is still possible to add a sensor for the
respective interface. Though, most likely the sensor for this interface
does not work correctly. The error message in this case is No Such Name
(SNMP error # 2).

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2183
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmphpenetworkinterfacesensor

§ snmphpe

§ hpe

HPE ProLiant Network Interface Settings

HPE ProLiant Netw ork Interface Settings

Setting Description

Network Interfaces Shows the name of the network interface that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2184
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2185
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2186
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors per second

Bad Frames Received The number of bad frames received per second

Bad Frames Transmitted The number of bad frames transmitted per second

Carrier Sense Errors The number of carrier sense errors per second

Excessive Collisions The number of excessive collisions per second

FCS Errors The number of Frame Check Sequence (FCS) errors per second

Frames Too Long The number of frames that are too long per second

Good Frames Received The number of good frames received per second

2187
Channel Description

Good Frames The number of good frames transmitted per second

Transmitted

Late Collisions The number of late collisions per second

Total The total traffic in bytes per second

Traffic In The incoming traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Traffic Out The outgoing traffic in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/33133

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2188
7.8.182 SNMP HPE ProLiant Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP HPE ProLiant Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in an HPE server via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE ProLiant Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2195 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE ProLiant Fysieke Schijf

§ French: HPE ProLiant disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE ProLiant Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Portuguese: Disco físico HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск HPE ProLiant п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Spanish: Disco físico HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

2189
Remarks
§ For Gen9 servers or earlier: This sensor requires HPE Insight Management Agents and HPE Insight
Management WBEM Providers to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: This sensor requires HPE Agentless Management and the HPE Agentless
Management Service to be installed on the target device.
§ For Gen10 servers: Use the HPE Integrated Lights Out (iLO) interface as the parent device for this
sensor.

§ The sensor only shows Disk Status and no other channels if it runs in "Limited Monitoring" mode. For
more information, see SNMP HPE ProLiant Physical Disk sensor not showing all information.
§ This sensor supports monitoring iLO as of iLO version 3. We recommend that you use iLO 4 or later.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

2190
The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

HPE ProLiant Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2191
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ snmphpephysicaldisksensor

§ physicaldisk

§ snmphpe

§ hpe

HPE ProLiant Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the ID of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

2192
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2193
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2194
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Corrected Read Errors The corrected read errors per second

Corrected Write Errors The corrected write errors per second

Disk Status The overall disk status

§ Up status 186 : OK
§ Warning status: Erase Done, Erase Queued, Erasing, Not
Authenticated, Predictive Failure
§ Down status: Failed, SSD Wear Out

§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Drive Condition The drive condition

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Hard Read Errors The number of hard read errors per second

Hard Write Errors The number of hard write errors per second

S.M.A.R.T. Status The Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.)

status
§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Replace Drive

§ Unknown status: Other

Sectors Read The number of sectors read per second

2195
Channel Description

Sectors Written The number of sectors written per second

Threshold Passed If the threshold is passed

§ Up status: No

§ Down status: Yes

More
Knowledge Base

SNMP HPE ProLiant Physical Disk sensor not showing all information
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/70009

Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/33133

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2196
7.8.183 SNMP HPE ProLiant System Health Sensor
The SNMP HPE ProLiant System Health sensor monitors the system health of an HPE ProLiant server
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP HPE ProLiant System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2202 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP HPE ProLiant Systeemstatus

§ French: HPE ProLiant état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP HPE ProLiant Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

2197
§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы HPE ProLiant п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP HPE ProLiant

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema HPE ProLiant (SNMP)

Remarks
§ For Gen9 servers or earlier: This sensor requires HPE Insight Management Agents and HPE Insight
Management WBEM Providers to be installed on the target device.

§ For Gen10 servers: Use the HPE Integrated Lights Out (iLO) interface as the parent device for this
sensor.
§ This sensor has predefined limits for temperatures and broken frames. You can change these limits
individually in the channel settings 3052 .
§ Redundant array of independent disks (RAID) controllers that have no hard disks assigned might
cause the Down status 186 . In this case, deactivate the respective controllers in the HPE ProLiant
BIOS to avoid sensor errors.
§ This sensor supports monitoring iLO as of iLO version 3. We recommend that you use iLO 4 or later.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

HPE system For Gen9 servers or earlier, this sensor needs a specific HPE system
management tools management tool to be installed on the target device to report data via
SNMP: HPE Insight Management Agents. To receive SNMP data from
redundant array of independent disks (RAID) controllers, you additionally
need HPE Insight Management Agents. For Gen10 servers, this sensor no
longer requires HPE system management tools.
For more details and download links, see the Knowledge Base:
Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?
For Gen9 servers or earlier, some of the HPE object identifiers (OID)
that this sensor uses are only accessible via the iLO interface. If this
sensor throws an error that it cannot find "such device types", create a
device that points to the address of the HPE iLO interface (if available) and
add the sensor to this device. We recommend that you use the Agentless
Management feature with configured SNMP. You can set this up in the
iLO configuration interface under Administration | Management | SNMP
Settings. For Gen10 servers, use the HPE iLO interface as parent device
for this sensor.

2198
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmphpesystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

§ snmphpe

§ hpe

2199
Setting Description

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2200
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2201
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Fan Status The CPU fan status

§ Up status 186 : OK
§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Disk Controller Status The disk controller status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

2202
Channel Description

§ Unknown status: Other

Fans Broken The number of broken fans

Fans Running The number of running fans

Fault Tolerant Fans The number of fault-tolerant broken fans

Broken

Fault Tolerant Fans The number of fault-tolerant running fans

Running

Overall Status The overall status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Power Consumption [#] The power consumption in watts (W)

Power Consumption [#] The power consumption in percent

(%)

Power Supply [#] The power supply condition

Condition
§ Up status: OK

§ Down status: Degraded, Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Power Supply [#] Status The power supply status

§ Up status: No Error

§ Down status: Bist Failure, Brownout, Calibration Table Invalid, Dac

Failure, Eprom Failure, Fan Failure, General Failure, Give Up On
Startup, Interlock Open, No Power Input, Nvram Invalid, Orring Diode
Failed, Ram Test Failed, Temp Failure, Voltage Channel Failed, Vref
Failure

2203
Channel Description

System Fan Status The system fan status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

Temperature [#] The temperature of the component

([Component])

Thermal Status The thermal status

§ Up status: OK

§ Warning status: Degraded

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: Other

More
Knowledge Base

Monitor HP ProLiant via SNMP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/33133

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Why is my SNMP HPE ProLiant System Health sensor in error status after updating PRTG?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61805

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2204
7.8.184 SNMP IBM System X Logical Disk Sensor
The SNMP IBM System X Logical Disk sensor monitors a logical disk in an IBM server via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP IBM System X Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2210 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP IBM System X Logical Disk

§ French: IBM System X disque logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP IBM System X Logischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico IBM System X (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск IBM System X п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Spanish: Disco lógico IBM System X (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires the IBM Systems Director Platform Agent to be installed on the target device.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2205
§ See the Knowledge Base: What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ See the Knowledge Base: IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device
(PE187/PE188/PE194)

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

IBM Systems Director This sensor needs the IBM Systems Director Platform Agent to be
Platform Agent installed on the target IBM device to monitor it via SNMP.
For more information, see the Knowledge Base: What are the
requirements to monitor IBM System x?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

IBM System X Logical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2206
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpibmlogicaldisksensor

§ logicaldisk

§ snmpibm

§ ibm

2207
IBM System X Logical Disk Settings

IBM System X Logical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the ID of the logical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2208
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2209
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Disk Status The disk status

§ Up status: Completed, In Service, Ok, Power Mode

§ Warning status: Dormant, Predictive Failure, Starting, Stressed

§ Down status: Aborted, Degraded, Error, Lost Communication, No

Contact, Non-Recoverable Error, Other, Stopped, Stopping, Supporting
Entity In Error, Unknown
This channel is the primary channel by default.

2210
More
Knowledge Base

What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59393

IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device (PE187/PE188/PE194)

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73914

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2211
7.8.185 SNMP IBM System X Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP IBM System X Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in an IBM server via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP IBM System X Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2217 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP IBM System X Physical Disk

§ French: IBM System X disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP IBM System X Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Portuguese: Disco físico IBM System X (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск IBM System X п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Spanish: Disco físico IBM System X (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires the IBM Systems Director Platform Agent to be installed on the target device.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2212
§ See the Knowledge Base: What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ See the Knowledge Base: IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device
(PE187/PE188/PE194)

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

IBM System X Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2213
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpibmphysicaldisksensor

§ physicaldisk

§ snmpibm

§ ibm

2214
IBM System X Physical Disk Settings

IBM System X Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the ID of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2215
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2216
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Disk Status The disk status

§ Up status: Completed, In Service, Ok, Power Mode

§ Warning status: Dormant, Predictive Failure, Starting, Stressed

§ Down status: Aborted, Degraded, Error, Lost Communication, No

Contact, Non-Recoverable Error, Other, Stopped, Stopping, Supporting
Entity In Error, Unknown
This channel is the primary channel by default.

2217
More
Knowledge Base

What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59393

IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device (PE187/PE188/PE194)

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73914

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2218
7.8.186 SNMP IBM System X Physical Memory Sensor
The SNMP IBM System X Physical Memory sensor monitors the memory modules in an IBM server via
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP IBM System X Physical Memory Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2225 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP IBM System X Physical Memory

§ French: IBM System X mémoire physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP IBM System X Physikalischer Speicher

§ Japanese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Portuguese: Memória física IBM System X (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физическая п ам ять IBM System X п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Spanish: Memoria física IBM System X (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires the IBM Systems Director Platform Agent to be installed on the target device.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2219
§ See the Knowledge Base: What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ See the Knowledge Base: IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device
(PE187/PE188/PE194)

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

IBM System X Physical Memory Settings

Setting Description

Modules Select the memory modules that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each memory module that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2220
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpibmphysicalmemorysensor

§ memorycontroller

§ snmpibm

§ ibm

2221
IBM System X Physical Memory Settings

IBM System X Physical Memory Settings

Setting Description

Name Shows the name of the memory module that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Caption Shows the caption of the memory module that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Serial Number Shows the serial number of the memory module that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Size Shows the size of the memory module that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2222
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2223
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2224
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Controller Condition. The condition of the memory controller

§ Up status: Completed, In Service, Ok, Power Mode

§ Warning status: Dormant, Predictive Failure, Starting, Stressed

§ Down status: Aborted, Degraded, Error, Lost Communication, No

Contact, Non-Recoverable Error, Other, Stopped, Stopping, Supporting
Entity In Error, Unknown
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Power The power status

§ Up status: On

§ Down status: Off

More
Knowledge Base

What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59393

IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device (PE187/PE188/PE194)
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73914

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2225
7.8.187 SNMP IBM System X System Health Sensor
The SNMP IBM System X System Health sensor monitors the system health of an IBM device via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP IBM System X System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2232 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP IBM System X System Health

§ French: IBM System X état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP IBM System X Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema IBM System X (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы IBM System X п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP IBM System X

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema IBM System X (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires the IBM Systems Director Platform Agent to be installed on the target device.

§ This sensor can also run directly on an Integrated Management Module (IMM) network port and can
show the overall health of IMMs.

2226
§ If the IBM device returns a string in an unexpected format for the percentage of fan revolutions (for
example, "offline"), this sensor shows -1% in the corresponding channel. You can define the Down
status for this via channel limits 3053 .
§ This sensor has predefined limits for several metrics. You can individually change these limits in the
channel settings. For detailed information about channel limits, see section Channel Settings 3052 .
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device
(PE187/PE188/PE194)

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

The SNMP IBM System X System Health sensor can also run directly on an IMM network port and
can show the overall health of IMMs.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

IBM System X System Health Specific

Setting Description

Measurements Select the measurements that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measurement that you select.

2227
Setting Description

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpibmsystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

2228
Setting Description

IBM System X System Health Specific

Setting Description

Source Shows the source of the measurement that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Measurement Shows the type of measurement that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

2229
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2230
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2231
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Ambient Temp The ambient temperature

CMOS Battery The CMOS battery voltage in millivolts (mV)

CPU [#] Temp The temperature of the CPU

Fan [#] Tach The fan revolutions per minute (RPM) or the percentage of the possible
maximum

Overall Status The overall system health

§ Up status 186 : Normal, System Level
§ Warning status: Non Critical

§ Down status: Critical

SysBrd 3.3V The 3.3V-system board voltage in mV

SysBrd 5V The 5V-system board voltage in mV

SysBrd 12V The 12V-system board voltage in mV

More
Knowledge Base

What are the requirements to monitor IBM System x?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59393

IBM System X sensors could not find any disk/data on this device (PE187/PE188/PE194)
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73914

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

2232
My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2233
7.8.188 SNMP interSeptor Pro Environment Sensor
The SNMP interSeptor Pro Environment sensor queries data from a Jacarta interSeptor Pro
environmental monitoring system via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP interSeptor Pro Environment Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2239 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP interSeptor Pro Omgeving

§ French: interSeptor Pro environnement (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP interSeptor Pro Umgebung

§ Japanese: SNMP interSeptor Pro

§ Portuguese: Ambiente interSeptor Pro (SNMP)

§ Russian: О кружаю щ ая среда interSeptor Pro п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP interSeptor Pro

§ Spanish: Entorno interSeptor Pro (SNMP)

Remarks
§ To monitor data of an interSeptor Pro device with this sensor, you must add the IP address of your
PRTG core server system to Access Control in the interSeptor Pro control panel. Open the interSeptor
Pro web interface, select InterSeptor Pro Menu | System Configuration | Access Control, and allow
access for the IP address of PRTG.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2234
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

InterSeptor Environment Specific

Setting Description

Measuring Point Select the measuring points that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measuring point that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2235
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ interseptor

§ environment

InterSeptor Environment Specific

Setting Description

Name Shows the name of the measuring point that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Measuring Point Shows the measuring point that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2236
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2237
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2238
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Humidity The humidity in percent

Temperature The temperature

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2239
7.8.189 SNMP Juniper NS System Health Sensor
The SNMP Juniper NS System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Juniper NetScreen device
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Juniper NS System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2244 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Juniper NS systeemstatus

§ French: Juniper NS état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Juniper NS Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Juniper NS

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Juniper NS (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы Juniper NS п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Juniper NS

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Juniper NS (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2240
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpjuniper

2241
Setting Description

§ systemhealth

Sensor Display

Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2242
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2243
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Utilization The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Memory Usage The memory usage in percent

Power Supply (Power) The status of the power supply

§ Up status 186 : Good
§ Down status: Fail

2244
Channel Description

Session Usage The session usage in percent

Temperature (System The system temperature

Temperature)

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2245
7.8.190 SNMP LenovoEMC Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP LenovoEMC Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in a LenovoEMC network-
attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP LenovoEMC Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2251 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP LenovoEMC fysieke schijf

§ French: LenovoEMC disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP LenovoEMC Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP LenovoEMC

§ Portuguese: Disco físico LenovoEMC (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск LenovoEMC п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP LenovoEMC

§ Spanish: Disco físico LenovoEMC (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2246
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

LenovoEMC NAS Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2247
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmplenovoemc

§ lenovoemc

§ physicaldisk

LenovoEMC NAS Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the ID of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2248
Setting Description

Name Shows the name of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Size Shows the size of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2249
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2250
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Disk Status The overall disk status

§ Up status 186 : Normal
§ Warning status: Foreign, Unknown

§ Down status: Faulted, Missing

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2251
7.8.191 SNMP LenovoEMC System Health Sensor
The SNMP LenovoEMC System Health sensor monitors the system health of a LenovoEMC network-
attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP LenovoEMC System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2256 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP LenovoEMC Systeem Status

§ French: LenovoEMC état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP LenovoEMC Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP LenovoEMC

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema LenovoEMC (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы LenovoEMC п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP LenovoEMC

§ Spanish: Salud sistema LenovoEMC (SNMP)

2252
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2253
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmplenovoemc

§ lenovoemc

§ systemhealth

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2254
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2255
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Fan "Internal Fan" The fan revolutions per minute (RPM)

RAID Status The status of the RAID

§ Up status 186 : Normal
§ Warning status: Degraded, RebuildFS, Rebuilding, Unknown

§ Down status: Faulted

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Temperature "CPU" The temperature of the CPU

Temperature "Drives" The temperature of the drives

Temperature "System" The temperature of the system

Voltage "System Voltage The system voltage (12V) in millivolts (mV)

(12V)"

Voltage "V1.1" The voltage of the 1.1V-battery in mV

Voltage "V3.3" The voltage of the 3.3V-battery in mV

2256
More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2257
7.8.192 SNMP Library Sensor
The SNMP Library sensor uses a Management Information Base (MIB) file to create sensors that monitor
a device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

The content of the MIB file determines which data types are available for monitoring. When you
create the sensor, it provides a list of counters that the target device returns based on every object
identifier (OID) in the MIB file.

The SNMP Library sensor does not appear as a running sensor. It uses the meta-scan facility of the
probe to find or to match OIDs from the MIB file. It is useful because you do not need to manually
enter OIDs.

To monitor SNMP-capable devices and to add sensors via the SNMP Library sensor, download the
manufacturer's MIB files for the target device, convert the MIB files to the OID library format, and
import 2265 them into PRTG. PRTG also provides precompiled .oidlib files 2265 that contain the OIDs of
SNMP counters for the most common network devices.

For more information, see the Knowledge Base: How do SNMP, MIBs and OIDs work?

SNMP Custom Advanced Sensor Created by SNMP Library Sensor

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Bibliotheek

§ French: Bibliothèque (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP-Bibliothek

2258
§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Biblioteca (SNMP)

§ Russian: Библио тека SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Biblioteca (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do SNMP, MIBs and OIDs work?

§ See the Knowledge Base: How can I import my MIB files into PRTG?

§ See the Knowledge Base: Can't find a sensor for my device in PRTG but I believe it supports SNMP.
How to proceed?

To import MIB files into PRTG Hosted Monitor, see section Manage a PRTG Hosted Monitor
Subscription 81 .

Add Sensor
PRTG shows a list of .oidlib files that are available on the system. This list contains all library files in the
\snmplibs subfolder of the PRTG program directory 3579 . It contains both the default PRTG library files and
your own library files.

List of SNMP Library Files

2259
The library file names in the list indicate their purpose. Select a library file that is suitable for the target
device (for example, choose an MIB file that you imported) and confirm via Ok.

If the library file not suitable for the target device, this results in the error message The scan for
available monitoring items has failed on this device: No such object (SNMP error # 222). If you see
this message, click Cancel and try to add the sensor with a different library file.

The SNMP Library sensor takes a list of OIDs that you import from an MIB file into an .oidlib file and
tests the OIDs against the target device to find the OIDs that the target device supports. This discovery
process is the meta-scan. If the sensor finds counters for the target device, the sensor settings open
with a list of all available monitoring items.

List of SNMP Single Values: Sorted by MIB, Category, Name

2260
List of SNMP Table Values: Sorted by MIB, Category (Table Name/OID), Row , Name

The list of SNMP table values sequentially presents row values to help you find the values you are
interested in.

You can also use the search to find the desired group or category. The search matches individual
strings, so if your string has a space in it, put the search string in quotes.

Select the counters that you want to monitor and click Save. PRTG creates sensors based on the OID
types of the selected counters.

Add Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Library Shows the path to the .oidlib file that this sensor uses.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Category Select the parameters that you want to monitor. The list is specific to your
setup. The list contains all counters that are available in the .oidlib file that
match the target device. Select one or more items by enabling or disabling
the check boxes in front of the respective line.

You can also select all items or cancel the selection by using the
check box in the table header.

2261
Setting Description

Depending on the type of the selected entries, PRTG creates the following
sensors:
§ SNMP Custom Advanced sensor : For up to 10 channels for 10 OIDs
2042

each. For example, 22 selected single values result in 3 sensors: 2

sensors with 10 channels and 1 sensor with 2 channels.

§ SNMP Custom String sensor 2050 : For each selected entry that returns a
string value.
§ SNMP Custom Table sensor 2068 : For up to 10 channels for 10 columns

per row. The channels represent the values in the columns of the same
row.

Once you create a custom SNMP sensor, you can create a device
template 3093 from it and prepare it for distribution. For example, you
can refine the template with better name templates.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2262
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmplibrarysensor

Sensor Specific
The available sensor settings depend on the sensor that the SNMP Library sensor creates. For details
about settings, see the sections of these sensors:

§ SNMP Custom Advanced sensor 2045

§ SNMP Custom String sensor 2052

§ SNMP Custom Table sensor 2072

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2263
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2264
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Import MIB Files

Additionally, you can create your own .oidlib files by importing the device manufacturers' MIB files
with the free MIB Importer tool. You can convert your MIB files and save the .oidlib file results to the
\snmplibs subfolder of the PRTG program directory 3579 .

For more information about the MIB Importer, see the Knowledge Base: How can I import my MIB
files into PRTG?

If the.oidlib files that you import contain lookups 3541 (you can see this in section Lookup in the MIB
Importer), you can define your own sensor states for the values that the lookups return. Add an SNMP
Library sensor with this .oidlib file. PRTG then creates a lookup definition file using the lookupname of
the chosen library as id parameter.

PRTG adds the lookups without status definitions, so the sensor shows the Warning status 186 by
default. You must edit the corresponding lookup files to get reliable alarms. Override the lookup
definition with your own custom lookup. For more information, see section Define Lookups 3547 .

To import MIB files into PRTG Hosted Monitor, see section Manage a PRTG Hosted Monitor
Subscription 81 .

Default .oidlib Files Overview

PRTG comes with the following .oidlib files.

2265
The .oidlib files might not support all devices or parameters.

.oidlib File Description

APC UPS.oidlib Monitors uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) from APC

American Power Conversion Corp.

APCSensorstationlib.oidlib Monitors alarm status, communication status, humidity, and

temperature as shown by an APC sensor station.

Basic Linux Library (UCD-SNMP- Monitors basic system parameters on Linux systems, such
MIB).oidlib as memory, disk and swap, CPU, and more.

cisco-interfaces.oidlib Monitors Cisco-specific parameters, for example, the number

of present network interfaces on a system, several states of
an interface (admin, oper, speed, type, errors, discards, etc.),
and more.

cisco-queue.oidlib Monitors queues on a Cisco interface, for example, queue

depth and its maximum, discarded messages from the
queue, the number of the queue within the queue set, and
more.

Dell Storage Management.oidlib Monitors Dell storage devices. Possible parameters include
disk arrays, battery and power supply, fan and temperature,
virtual disk, and more.

Dell Systems Management Monitors the hardware of Dell systems. Possible parameters
Instrumentation.oidlib include ACPower and battery, alerts, base board, BIOS,
Baseboard Management Controller (BMC), chassis, COO,
cooling, event log, firmware, integrated development
environment (IDE), keyboard, memory, port, network,
processor, Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), system,
temperature, USB, universally unique identifier (UUID), and
more.

HP LaserJet Status.oidlib Monitors toner, paper, and jam status of an HP LaserJet

printer.

Linux SNMP (AX BGP DisMan Monitors different aspects of Linux systems.
EtherLike Host).oidlib
This file might detect a very large number of interfaces. It
might take a few seconds until the selection table
appears.

Linux SNMP (Framework Proxy Noti Monitors different aspects of Linux systems.
v2).oidlib
This file might detect a very large number of interfaces. It
might take a few seconds until the selection table
appears.

2266
.oidlib File Description

Linux SNMP (IP Net SNMP Noti Monitors different aspects of Linux systems.
OSPF RMON SMUX).oidlib
This file might detect a very large number of interfaces. It
might take a few seconds until the selection table
appears.

Linux SNMP (Source TCP UCD Monitors different aspects of Linux systems.
UDP).oidlib
This file might detect a very large number of interfaces. It
might take a few seconds until the selection table
appears.

Paessler Common OID Library.oidlib Monitors many common hardware devices. It is used for
several sensors and is encrypted.

SNMP Informant std.oidlib Monitors logical disks, processor, memory, and network
interface on Windows systems.

More
Knowledge Base

How do SNMP, MIBs and OIDs work?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/653

How can I import my MIB files into PRTG?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/733

Can't find a sensor for my device in PRTG but I believe it supports SNMP. How to proceed?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/65638

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

How can I monitor EMC Isilon storage systems with PRTG?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/71413

PAESSLER TOOLS

MIB Importer

2267
§ https://www.paessler.com/tools/mibimporter

For more information about sensor settings, see the following sections:

§ List of Available Sensor Types 3626

§ Additional Sensor Types (Custom Sensors) 3047

§ Channel Settings 3052

§ Notification Triggers Settings 3063

2268
7.8.193 SNMP Linux Disk Free Sensor
The SNMP Linux Disk Free sensor monitors the free space on disks of a Linux/Unix system via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Linux Disk Free Sensor

The free space that this sensor returns shows the disk space that is not yet used. Not all of this
space may be available for use because a part of this space may be reserved by the system, for
example, for redundancy purposes. For details, see the Knowledge Base: Why do SSH Disk Free and
SNMP Linux Disk Free show different values for my target Linux system?

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2277 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Linux vrije schijf ruimte

§ French: Linux espace disponible du disque (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Linux-Datenträgerspeicher

§ Japanese: SNMP Linux

§ Portuguese: Disco livre Linux (SNMP)

2269
§ Russian: Сво бо дн о е п ро стран ство диска в Linux п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Linux

§ Spanish: Espacio libre en disco Linux (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Why do SSH Disk Free and SNMP Linux Disk Free show different values
for my target Linux system?
§ See the Knowledge Base: Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2270
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdiskfreesensor

§ diskspacesensor

Set Limits Checkes for ALL Disks

In this section, you can set limits that are valid for all channels and all drives. With limits, you can define
when the sensor shows the Warning or Down status 186 , depending on the data provided by all drives
that this sensor monitors. If you want to individually define limits for separate channels, use the limit
settings in the channel settings 3052 .

All limits that you define here are valid in addition to the limits in the particular channel settings. The
limits are valid simultaneously, so the first limit that is breached applies.

Set Limits Checkes for ALL Disks

2271
Setting Description

Percentage Limit Check Enable or disable a limit check for the free space in percentage channels
of all drives. By default, the sensor enables percentage limits with a lower
warning limit and a lower error limit. Choose between:
§ Only use the limits in the settings of the percentage channels: Do not
define sensor limits that are valid for all percentage channels. The
sensor only uses the limits that you define in the settings of the
particular "free space in percent" channels to determine the status.
§ Use the limits of both the sensor and the channel settings: Define
sensor limits that are valid for all percentage channels. Additional fields
appear below. The sensor shows the Warning or the Down status when
free space limits are above or below the limits.

Upper Error Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify an upper limit in percent for the
Down status. If the free disk space of one of your drives exceeds this
value, the sensor changes to the Down status. Enter an integer or leave
the field empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

Upper Warning Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify an upper limit in percent for the
Warning status. If the free disk space of one of your drives exceeds this
value, the sensor changes to the Warning status. Enter an integer or leave
the field empty.

The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

Lower Warning Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify a lower limit in percent for the
Warning status. If the free disk space of one of your drives falls below this
value, the sensor changes to the Warning status. Enter an integer or leave
the field empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

2272
Setting Description

Size Limit Check Enable or disable a limit check for the free bytes channels of all drives:
§ Only use the limits in the settings of the byte size channels: Do not
define sensor limits that are valid for all byte size channels. The sensor
only uses limits that you define in the settings of the particular free
space in bytes channels to determine the status.
§ Use the limits of both the sensor and the channel settings: Define limits
for the sensor that are valid for all byte size channels. Additional fields
appear below. The sensor shows the Warning or Down status when free
space limits are above or below the value.
By default, byte size limits are not enabled for drives.

Upper Error Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify an upper limit. Use the same unit
as shown by the free bytes channels of this sensor (by default this is MB).
If the free disk space of one of your drives exceeds this value, the sensor
changes to the Down status. Enter an integer or leave the field empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

Upper Warning Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify an upper limit. Use the same unit
as shown by the free bytes channels of this sensor (by default this is MB).
If the free disk space of one of your drives exceeds this value, the sensor
changes to the Warning status. Enter an integer or leave the field empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

2273
Setting Description

Lower Error Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify a lower limit. Use the same unit
as shown by the free bytes channels of this sensor (by default this is MB).
If the free disk space of one of your drives falls below this value, the
sensor changes to the Down status. Enter an integer or leave the field
empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

Alarm on If a monitored disk is removed or not found, the sensor sets the values to
Missing/Removed Disk zero. Select the alarm approach in this case:
§ Deactivate alarm (default): Do not send an alert for a removed disk.

§ Activate alarm: Send an alert if a monitored disk is removed or not

found.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2274
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2275
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2276
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Free Bytes [Partition] The free space in bytes

Free INodes [Partition] The free index nodes in percent

Free Space [Partition] The free space in percent

Total The free total disk space in bytes

More
Knowledge Base

Why do SSH Disk Free and SNMP Linux Disk Free show different values for my target Linux system?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/43183

Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/5353

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2277
7.8.194 SNMP Linux Load Average Sensor
The SNMP Linux Load Average sensor monitors the system load average of a Linux/Unix system via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Linux Load Average Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2281 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Linux Gemiddelde belasting

§ French: Linux charge moyenne (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Linux Durchschnittliche Last

§ Japanese: SNMP Linux

§ Portuguese: Carga média Linux (SNMP)

§ Russian: Средн яя загрузка Linux п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Linux

§ Spanish: Promedio de carga Linux (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

2278
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmploadsensor

2279
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2280
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2281
Channel Description

1 Minute The average system load within a 1-minute interval

This channel is the primary channel by default.

5 Minutes The average system load within a 5-minute scanning interval

15 Minutes The average system load within a 15-minute interval

More
Knowledge Base

Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/5353

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2282
7.8.195 SNMP Linux Meminfo Sensor
The SNMP Linux Meminfo sensor monitors the memory usage of a Linux/Unix system via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Linux Meminfo Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2287 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Linux meminfo

§ French: Linux information mémoire (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Linux Speicherinfo

§ Japanese: SNMP Linux

§ Portuguese: Meminfo Linux (SNMP)

§ Russian: Linux Meminfo п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Linux

§ Spanish: Meminfo Linux (SNMP)

2283
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2284
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpmeminfosensor

§ memorysensor

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2285
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2286
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available Memory The available memory in bytes

Available Memory % The available memory in percent

2287
Channel Description

Free Physical Memory The free physical memory in bytes

Free Physical Memory % The free physical memory in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Free Swap Space The free swap memory in bytes

Free Swap Space % The free swap memory in percent

Total Free Memory The total free memory (physical memory plus swap) in bytes

Total Free Memory % The total free memory (physical memory plus swap) in percent

More
Knowledge Base

Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/5353

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2288
7.8.196 SNMP Linux Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Linux Physical Disk sensor monitors the input/output (I/O) on disks of a Linux/Unix system
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Linux Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2294 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Linux Fysieke Schijf

§ French: Linux disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Linux Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Linux

§ Portuguese: Disco físico Linux (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск Linux п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Linux

§ Spanish: Disco físico Linux (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2289
§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2290
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpphysicaldisksensor

§ physicaldisk

Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

BitMask Shows the bitmask that might be necessary for bug tracking purposes.

2291
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2292
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2293
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Bytes Read The bytes read per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Bytes Written The bytes written per second

Load Average (1 Minute) The load average (1 minute) in percent

Load Average (5 Minute) The load average (5 minutes) in percent

Load Average (15 Minute) The load average (15 minutes) in percent

Read Accesses The number of read accesses per second

Write Accesses The number of write accesses per second

2294
More
Knowledge Base

Monitoring Linux problem - SNMP port not reachable

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/5353

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2295
7.8.197 SNMP Memory Sensor
The SNMP Memory sensor monitors the memory usage of a system via the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).

This sensor uses more generic object identifier (OID) values in comparison to the SNMP Linux
Meminfo sensor 2283 .

SNMP Memory Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2301 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Geheugen

§ French: Mémoire (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Speicher

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Memória (SNMP)

§ Russian: П ам ять п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Memoria (SNMP)

2296
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Memory Settings

Setting Description

Memory Type Select the memory types that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each memory type that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2297
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpmemorysensor

§ memory

§ memorysensor

§ snmp

Memory Settings

Setting Description

Memory Type Shows the type of memory that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2298
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2299
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2300
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available Memory The available memory in bytes

Percent Available The available memory in percent

Memory
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Total Memory The total memory in bytes

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

2301
My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2302
7.8.198 SNMP NetApp Disk Free Sensor
The SNMP NetApp Disk Free sensor monitors the free space on disks of a NetApp storage system via
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp Disk Free Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2308 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp Schijf Vrije Ruimte

§ French: NetApp espace disponible du disque (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp-Datenträgerspeicher

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Disco livre NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Сво бо дн о е п ро стран ство диска NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

§ Spanish: Espacio libre en disco NetApp (SNMP)

2303
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

NetApp Disk Free Settings

Setting Description

File System Select the disks that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each disk that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2304
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdiskfreesensor

§ snmpnetappdiskfreesensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

NetApp Disk Free Settings

2305
Setting Description

File System Shows the name of the disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Virtual Disk Shows the name of the virtual disk that this sensor monitors (if
applicable).
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2306
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2307
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Deduplication Saved The deduplication saved space in bytes

Space

Deduplication Saved The deduplication saved space in percent

Space %

Deduplication Shared The deduplication shared space in bytes

Space

Deduplication Shared The deduplication shared space in percent

Space %

Disk Status The disk status

2308
Channel Description

§ Up status : Creating, Mounted, Mounting, Nofsinfo, Replayed,

186

Replaying, Unmounting
§ Down status: Destroying, Frozen, Unmounted

Files Free The free files in percent

Free Bytes The free space in bytes

Free Space The free space in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

INodes Free The free index nodes in percent

More
Knowledge Base

How can I monitor capacity and used disk space on a NetApp?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61231

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2309
7.8.199 SNMP NetApp Enclosure Sensor
The SNMP NetApp Enclosure sensor monitors the power supply and cooling of an enclosure that is part
of a NetApp storage system via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp Enclosure Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2316 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp Behuizing

§ French: NetApp boîtier (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp Enclosure

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Gabinete NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ко рп ус NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

§ Spanish: Gabinete NetApp (SNMP)

2310
Remarks
§ This sensor only supports NetApp versions up to 8.2.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

NetApp Enclosure Settings

Setting Description

Enclosures Select the power supply and cooling measurements of the enclosures that
you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for each
enclosure/measurement combination that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2311
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpnetappenclosuresensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

NetApp Enclosure Settings

2312
Setting Description

Enclosure Shows the identifier of the enclosure that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Measurement Shows the type of measurement that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

NetApp Specific

Setting Description

N/A Measurement Define the sensor behavior if the requested NetApp value is not available
Handling (N/A values):
§ Set sensor to down status (default): Set the sensor to the Down
status 186 if a measurement is not available.
We recommend that you use this setting to not miss any hardware
errors.

§ Interpret as valid: Handle unavailable measurements as valid sensor

results to keep the sensor in the Up status.
This might be useful, for example, if a hardware sensor on the
NetApp is disabled for some reason but actually there is no
hardware error. If the NetApp returns an N/A measurement, the sensor
interprets this as 0.
We recommend that you use the lookup file
prtg.standardlookups.netapp.notavailable.ovl for channels with
unavailable measurements if you select this option. This replaces 0 with
the message Not Available. Open the settings 3052 of the affected
channels and select this file in section Lookup. For details, see section
Define Lookups 3541 .

2313
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2314
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2315
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Broken Electronic Parts The number of broken electronic parts

Broken Power Supplies The number of broken power supplies

Current [#] The current in milliampere (mA)

Fan [#] The fan revolutions per minute (RPM)

Fans Failed The number of failed fans

Voltage [#] The voltage in millivolts (mV)

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

2316
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2317
7.8.200 SNMP NetApp I/O Sensor
The SNMP NetApp I/O sensor monitors the input/output operations per second (IOPS) on a NetApp
storage system via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp I/O Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2322 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp I/O

§ French: NetApp E/S (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp E/A

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp I/O

§ Portuguese: E/S NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Вво д-вы во д NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp I/O

2318
§ Spanish: E/S NetApp (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor only supports NetApp versions up to 8.2.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ If you use NetApp cDOT 8.3 or NetApp ONTAP 9.0 or later, we recommend that you use the NetApp
I/O sensor 1450 instead.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2319
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ snmpnetappiosensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2320
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2321
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CIFS Ops The number of Common Internet File System (CIFS) operations per
second

Disk Read The disk read speed in bytes per second

2322
Channel Description

Disk Write The disk write speed in bytes per second

FCP Ops The number of Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP) operations per second

FCP Read The FCP read speed in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

FCP Write The FCP write speed in bytes per second

HTTP Ops The number of HTTP operations per second

ISCSI Ops The number of Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI)
operations per second

ISCSI Read The ISCSI read speed in bytes per second

ISCSI Write The ISCSI write speed in bytes per second

Network Received The number of bytes received per second

Network Sent The number of bytes sent per second

NFS Ops The network file system (NFS) operations per second

Tape Read The tape read speed in bytes per second

Tape Write The tape write speed in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2323
7.8.201 SNMP NetApp License Sensor
The SNMP NetApp License sensor monitors the licenses for the services of a NetApp storage system
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp License Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2329 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp licentie

§ French: NetApp Licence (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp Lizenz

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Licença NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Лицен зия NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

§ Spanish: Licencia NetApp (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor only supports NetApp versions up to 8.2.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2324
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

NetApp License Settings

Setting Description

Licenses for Services Select the licenses for the services that you want to monitor. PRTG
creates one sensor for each license that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2325
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpnetapplicensesensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

NetApp License Settings

Setting Description

License for Service Shows the name of the license whose service this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2326
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2327
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2328
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Time Left The time until the license for a service expires
This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2329
7.8.202 SNMP NetApp Logical Unit Sensor
The SNMP NetApp Logical Unit sensor monitors the input/output operations per second (IOPS) on a
logical unit of a NetApp storage system via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp Logical Unit Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2336 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp Logical Unit

§ French: NetApp unité logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp Logische Einheit

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Unidade lógica NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический бло к NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

§ Spanish: Unidad lógica NetApp (SNMP)

2330
Remarks
§ This sensor only supports NetApp versions up to 8.2.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

§ If you use NetApp cDOT 8.3 or NetApp ONTAP 9.0 or later, we recommend that you use the NetApp
LUN sensor 1471 instead.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

NetApp Logical Unit Settings

Setting Description

Logical Unit Select the logical units that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each logical unit that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Alignment Monitoring Select if the sensor checks the alignment of the logical unit:
§ Do not check alignment

§ Check alignment (if available)

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2331
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpdiskfreesensor

§ snmpnetappdiskfreesensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

2332
NetApp Logical Unit Settings

NetApp Logical Unit Settings

Setting Description

Logical Unit Shows the name of the logical unit that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Alignment Monitoring Shows if the sensor checks the alignment of the logical unit.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Volume Shows the volume that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Comment Shows comments for the logical unit that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

2333
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2334
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2335
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Data Read The data read speed in bytes per second

Data Written The data write speed in bytes per second

Errors The number of errors per second

Ops The total number of operations per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Other Ops The number of other operations per second

Read Ops The number of disk read operations per second

Status The status of the logical unit

§ Up status 186 : Online
§ Down status: Offline

Write Ops The number of disk write operations per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2336
7.8.203 SNMP NetApp Network Interface Sensor
The SNMP NetApp Network Interface sensor monitors a network card of a NetApp storage system via
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp Netw ork Interface Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2342 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp Network Interface

§ French: NetApp interface réseau (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp Netzwerkschnittstelle

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Interface de rede NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Сетево й ин терф ейс NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

§ Spanish: Interfaz de red NetApp (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor only supports NetApp versions up to 8.2.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2337
§ If you use NetApp cDOT 8.3 or NetApp ONTAP 9.0 or later, we recommend that you use the NetApp
NIC sensor 1482 instead.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

NetApp Network Interface Settings

Setting Description

Network Interface Select the network interfaces that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each interface that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2338
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpnetappnetworkinterfacesensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

NetApp Network Interface Settings

NetApp Netw ork Interface Settings

Setting Description

Network Interface Shows the name of the network interface that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2339
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2340
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2341
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Errors In The number of incoming errors per second

Errors Out The number of outgoing errors per second

Traffic In The incoming traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Traffic Out The outgoing traffic in bytes per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2342
What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2343
7.8.204 SNMP NetApp System Health Sensor
The SNMP NetApp System Health sensor monitors the status of a NetApp storage system via the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP NetApp System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2348 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP NetApp Systeemstatus

§ French: NetApp intégrité du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP NetApp Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP NetApp

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema NetApp (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы NetApp п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP NetApp

2344
§ Spanish: Salud de sistema NetApp (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ If you use NetApp cDOT 8.3 or NetApp ONTAP 9.0 or later, we recommend that you use the NetApp
System Health sensor 1513 instead.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2345
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ snmpnetappsystemhealthsensor

§ snmpnetapp

§ netapp

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2346
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2347
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Load The CPU load in percent

Disks Active The number of active disks

2348
Channel Description

Disks Being Added The number of disks being added

Disks Being Scrubbed The number of disks being scrubbed

Disks Failed The number of failed disks

Disks Failing Soon The number of disks that will fail soon

Disks Out Of Date The number of disks that are out of date

Disks Reconstructing The number of disks that are reconstructing

Disks Reconstructing The number of disks that are reconstructing parity

Parity

Disks Spare The number of spare disks

Disks Total The number of disks in total

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Disks Verifying Parity The number of disks that are verifying parity

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2349
7.8.205 SNMP Nutanix Cluster Health Sensor
The SNMP Nutanix Cluster Health sensor monitors the status and the performance of a Nutanix cluster
via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Nutanix Cluster Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2356 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Nutanix Cluster Health

§ French: Nutanix état de cluster (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Nutanix Clusterzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Nutanix

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do cluster Nutanix (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть кластера SNMP Nutanix

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Nutanix

§ Spanish: Salud de clúster Nutanix (SNMP)

Remarks
§ Nutanix devices only support SNMP v3. Make sure that you select SNMP v3 in the credentials for
SNMP devices 548 settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2350
§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

System Specific

Setting Description

Measurement Select the measurements that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measurement that you select.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

2351
Setting Description

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpnutanixclusterhealthsensor

§ snmp

§ nutanix

System Specific

2352
Setting Description

Measurement Shows the type of measurement that this sensor monitors.

Sensor Version Shows the version of the sensor definition that was used to create this
sensor.

Identifier Shows the value that the sensor uses to find the component in the OID
table.

OID Index Shows the OID table index that this sensor uses.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2353
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2354
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2355
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

I/O Bandwidth The bandwidth of input/output (I/O) operations in bytes per second

I/O Latency The latency of I/O operations in milliseconds (ms)

I/O Operations The number of I/O operations per second

Status The status of the Nutanix cluster

§ Up status 186 : Started
§ Warning status: Starting, Stopping

§ Down status: Stopped, Unknown

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2356
7.8.206 SNMP Nutanix Hypervisor Sensor
The SNMP Nutanix Hypervisor sensor monitors a Nutanix hypervisor via the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Nutanix Hypervisor Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2363 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Nutanix Hypervisor

§ French: Nutanix hyperviseur (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Nutanix Hypervisor

§ Japanese: SNMP Nutanix

§ Portuguese: Hipervisor Nutanix (SNMP)

§ Russian: Гип ервизо р SNMP Nutanix

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Nutanix

§ Spanish: Hipervisor Nutanix (SNMP)

2357
Remarks
§ Nutanix devices only support SNMP v3. Make sure that you select SNMP v3 in the credentials for
SNMP devices 548 settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

System Specific

Setting Description

Measurements Select the measurements that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each measurement that you select.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2358
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpnutanixhypervisorsensor

§ snmp

§ nutanix

System Specific

2359
Setting Description

Measurement Shows the type of measurement that this sensor monitors.

Sensor Version Shows the version of the sensor definition that was used to create this
sensor.

Identifier Shows the value that the sensor uses to find the component in the OID
table.

OID Index Shows the OID table index that this sensor uses.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2360
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2361
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2362
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Bytes Received The number of bytes received per second

Bytes Sent The number of bytes sent per second

CPU Usage The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

I/O Bandwidth The bandwidth of input/output (I/O) operations in bytes per second

I/O Latency The latency of I/O operations in microseconds (µ s)

I/O Read The read speed of I/O operations per second

I/O Write The write speed of I/O operations per second

Package Drop In The number of dropped incoming packages per second

Package Drop Out The number of dropped outgoing packages per second

VM Count The number of virtual machines (VM)

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2363
7.8.207 SNMP Poseidon Environment Sensor
The SNMP Poseidon Environment sensor monitors performance counters for environmental
measurements on Poseidon hardware via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Poseidon Environment Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2369 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Poseidon Omgeving

§ French: Poseidon environnement (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Poseidon-Umgebung

§ Japanese: SNMP Poseidon

§ Portuguese: Ambiente Poseidon (SNMP)

§ Russian: О кружаю щ ая среда Poseidon п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Poseidon

§ Spanish: Entorno Poseidon (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ For a general introduction to the technology behind SNMP, see section Monitoring via SNMP 3348 .

2364
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Poseidon Environment Specific

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2365
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ apcups

Poseidon Environment Specific

Setting Description

Name Shows the name of the measurement that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Unit Shows the unit of the value measurement that this sensor monitors.

2366
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Measuring Point Shows the measuring points that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2367
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2368
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

[Value] The humidity in percent or the temperature

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2369
7.8.208 SNMP Printer Sensor
The SNMP Printer sensor monitors various types of printers via the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).

The sensor supports the following printers, among others: HP OfficeJet printers, HP LaserJet
printers, RICOH SP 5200, SP 3410, SP C242DN, MP C3003, and MP C2503.

The sensor also shows the printer status as the sensor message.

SNMP Printer Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2374 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Printer

§ French: Imprimante (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Drucker

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Impressora (SNMP)

§ Russian: П рин тер п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Impresora (SNMP)

2370
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the following printers, among others: HP OfficeJet printers, HP LaserJet printers,
RICOH SP 5200, SP 3410, SP C242DN, MP C3003, and MP C2503.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2371
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ snmp

§ printer

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2372
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2373
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Black Cartridge [Printer] The fill level of the cartridge

§ Up status: Cover Closed, Interlock Closed

§ Warning status: Other

§ Down status: Cover Open, Interlock Open

§ Unknown status: Unknown

Total Page Count The total number of printed pages

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Yellow Cartridge [Printer] The fill level of the cartridge

§ Up status: No Restriction, Not Empty, Ok

§ Warning status: Low

§ Down status: Critical

§ Unknown status: Unknown

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2375
7.8.209 SNMP QNAP Logical Disk Sensor
The SNMP QNAP Logical Disk sensor monitors a logical disk in a Quality Network Appliance Provider
(QNAP) network-attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP QNAP Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2381 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP QNAP Logische Schijf

§ French: QNAP disque logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP QNAP Logischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP QNAP

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico QNAP (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск QNAP п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP QNAP

§ Spanish: Disco lógico QNAP (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2376
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

QNAP NAS Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Channel Description

Free Bytes The free space in bytes

Free Space The free space in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Volume Status The volume status

§ Up status 186 : Ready
§ Warning status: In Degraded Mode, Rebuilding, Synchronizing

§ Down status: Failure

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Why do I get DoS alarms on my QNAP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/80421

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2381
7.8.210 SNMP QNAP Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP QNAP Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in a Quality Network Appliance
Provider (QNAP) network-attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP QNAP Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2387 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP QNAP Fysieke Schijf

§ French: QNAP disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP QNAP Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP QNAP

§ Portuguese: Disco físico QNAP (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск QNAP п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP QNAP

§ Spanish: Disco físico QNAP (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2382
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

QNAP NAS Settings

Setting Description

Unit Select the unit of the temperature measurement:

§ Celsius

§ Fahrenheit

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

2383
Setting Description

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpqnap

§ qnap

§ physicaldisk

QNAP NAS Settings

2384
Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Description Shows information about the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Model Shows the model of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Capacity Shows the capacity of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Unit Shows the unit of the temperature measurement.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2385
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2386
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

HD Status The disk status

§ Up status 186 : Ready
§ Down status: Invalid, No Disk, RwError, Unknown

S.M.A.R.T. Status The Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.)

status of the disk
§ Up status: Good, Normal

§ Down status: Bad

2387
Channel Description

Temperature The temperature

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Why do I get DoS alarms on my QNAP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/80421

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2388
7.8.211 SNMP QNAP System Health Sensor
The SNMP QNAP System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Quality Network Appliance
Provider (QNAP) network-attached storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP QNAP System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2393 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP QNAP Systeemstatus

§ French: QNAP état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP QNAP Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP QNAP

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema QNAP (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы QNAP п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP QNAP

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema QNAP (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2389
§ For a general introduction to the technology behind SNMP, see section Monitoring via SNMP 3348 .

QNAP NAS Settings

Setting Description

Unit Select the unit of the temperature measurement:

§ Celsius

§ Fahrenheit

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2390
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpqnap

§ qnap

§ systemhealth

QNAP NAS Settings

Setting Description

Unit Shows the unit of temperature measurement that the sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

2391
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2392
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available Memory The available memory in bytes

CPU Temperature The temperature of the CPU

CPU Usage The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Fan [#] (System FAN [#]) The fan revolutions per minute (RPM)

2393
Channel Description

System Temperature The system temperature

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Why do I get DoS alarms on my QNAP?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/80421

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2394
7.8.212 SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status Sensor
The SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status sensor monitors the overall status of Rittal data center
hardware, for example Rittal Computer Multi Control version 3 (CMC III) processing units, Rittal power
distribution units (PDU), or Rittal IoT Interfaces and the hardware status of every attached external
sensor via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardw are Status Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2399 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ French: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ German: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ Japanese: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ Portuguese: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ Russian: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

§ Spanish: SNMP Rittal CMC III Hardware Status

2395
Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2396
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmprittal

§ cmc3

Sensor Display

Setting Setting

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2397
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2398
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Overall Device Status The overall status of the device

§ Up status: OK, Update

§ Warning status: Warning, Detected, Changed

§ Down status: Alarm, Lost

[Status of attached The status of an attached external sensor

external sensor]
§ Up status: OK; Firmware Update Pending; Firmware Update Running

§ Warning status: Device Detected, Confirmation Required; Device

Changed
§ Down status: Device Not Available; Device Lost (Disconnected),
Confirmation Required; Error

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2399
7.8.213 SNMP RMON Sensor
The SNMP RMON sensor monitors traffic on a device using the Remote Monitoring (RMON) standard via
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

You can create it on an SNMP-compatible device that provides traffic data via RMON. Depending on
the data that the device returns, PRTG displays traffic data for each port in different channels, which
allows a detailed analysis. If available, the sensor queries 64-bit counters.

SNMP RMON Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2406 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP RMON

§ French: RMON (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP RMON

§ Japanese: SNMP RMON

§ Portuguese: RMON (SNMP)

§ Russian: RMON п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP RMON

2400
§ Spanish: RMON (SNMP)

Remarks
§ You can define the displayed sensor name with port name templates in the SNMP compatibility
options 571 of the parent device.
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: What value does the Transmitted channel of an RMON sensor show?

§ See the Knowledge Base: SNMP Traffic sensors when the device changes them

§ See the Knowledge Base: Where is the volume line in graphs?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

RMON Specific

Setting Description

Ports Select the ports that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each port that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
You can select interfaces and cancel the selection by clicking Select
all connected interfaces, Select all disconnected interfaces, and
Deselect all interfaces.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2401
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmprmon

2402
RMON Specific

RMON Specific

Setting Description

Port Shows the number of the interface port that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Channel Mask Describes which channels are available and might be useful for the
Paessler support team.

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2403
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2404
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2405
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Broadcast Packets The number of broadcast packets per second

Collisions The number of collisions per second

CRC Errors The number of cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors per second

Drop Events The number of drop events per second

Fragments The number of fragments per second

Jabbers The number of jabbers per second

Multicast Packets The number of multicast packets per second

Oversize Packets The number of oversize packets per second

Packets The number of packets per second

Packets <= 64 Byte The number of packets with less than or equal to 64 bytes per second

Packets 65 - 127 Bytes The number of packets with 65 - 127 bytes per second

Packets 128 - 255 Bytes The number of packets with 128 - 255 bytes per second

Packets 256 - 511 Bytes The number of packets with 256 - 511 bytes per second

Packets 512 - 1023 The number of packets with 512 - 1023 bytes per second
Bytes

Packets 1024 - 1518 The number of packets with 1024 - 1518 bytes per second
Bytes

Transmitted The transmitted bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

2406
Channel Description

Undersize Packets The number of undersize packets per second

More
Knowledge Base

What value does the Transmitted channel of an RMON sensor show?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59821

SNMP Traffic sensors when the device changes them

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/25893

Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61272

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2407
7.8.214 SNMP SonicWall System Health Sensor
The SNMP SonicWall System Health sensor monitors health values of a SonicWall Network Security
Appliance (NSA) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP SonicWall System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2412 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP SonicWall Systeem Gezondheid

§ French: SonicWall état du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP SonicWall Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP SonicWall

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema SonicWall (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы SonicWall п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP SonicWall

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema SonicWall (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Why does PRTG write error messages into my SonicWall log?

2408
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpsonicwallsystemhealthsensor

§ systemhealth

2409
Setting Description

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2410
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2411
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Connection Cache Used The connection cache usage in percent

CPU Usage The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Memory Usage The memory usage in percent

2412
More
Knowledge Base

Why does PRTG write error messages into my SonicWall log?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61961

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2413
7.8.215 SNMP SonicWall VPN Traffic Sensor
The SNMP SonicWall VPN Traffic sensor monitors the traffic of an Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)
VPN on a SonicWall Network Security Appliance (NSA) via the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).

SNMP SonicWall VPN Traffic Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2420 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP SonicWall VPN Verkeer

§ French: SonicWall trafic VPN (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP SonicWall VPN-Datenverkehr

§ Japanese: SNMP SonicWall VPN

§ Portuguese: Tráfego de VPN SonicWall (SNMP)

§ Russian: Траф ик VPN SonicWall п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP SonicWall VPN

§ Spanish: Tráfico VPN SonicWall (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2414
§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Why does PRTG write error messages into my SonicWall log?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SonicWall VPN Specific

Setting Description

Connections Select the connections that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each connection that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Identification Method Define how you want to identify the connection that you want to monitor:
§ Index: Every connection has a unique index. This is the safest method
to identify your connection. If the connection is lost and reconnected, it
receives a new index.
§ Remote IP address: If the target of the VPN always has the same IP
address, you can use this IP address to identify the connection.

§ Security policy name: If you use a different security policy for every
VPN, you can use its name to identify the connection.
§ Remote IP address and security policy name: You can also combine
both identification methods.
§ Remote IP address, security policy name, and IP address ranges: If you
use separate connections for specific IP address ranges, identify the
connection by remote IP address, security policy name, and IP address
ranges.
§ IP address ranges: Use IP address ranges only to identify the
connection.
The sensor always uses the first connection that it finds that matches
all criteria.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2415
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpsonicwallvpntrafficsensor

§ traffic

2416
SonicWall VPN Specific

SonicWall VPN Specific

Setting Description

Security Policy Shows the security policy of the connection that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Remote IP Address Shows the remote IP address of the connection that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Source IP Addresses Shows the source IP addresses of the connection that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Destination IP Addresses Shows the destination IP addresses of the connection that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Index Shows the index of the connection that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Identification Method Shows the identification method of the connection that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2417
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2418
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2419
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Decrypted Packets The number of decrypted packets per second

Decrypted Transmissions The decrypted transmissions in bytes per second

Encrypted Packets The number of encrypted packets per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Encrypted Transmissions The encrypted transmissions in bytes per second

Fragmented Packets In The number of incoming fragmented packets per second

Fragmented Packets Out The number of outgoing fragmented packets per second

2420
More
Knowledge Base

Why does PRTG write error messages into my SonicWall log?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61961

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2421
7.8.216 SNMP Synology Logical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Synology Logical Disk sensor monitors a logical disk in a Synology network-attached
storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Synology Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2426 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Synology Logische Schijf

§ French: Synology disque logique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Synology Logischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Synology

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico Synology (SNMP)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск Synology п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Synology

§ Spanish: Disco lógico Synology (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2422
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Synology NAS Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2423
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpsynology

§ synology

§ logicaldisk

Synology NAS Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the name of the disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. We strongly

recommend that you only change it if the Paessler support team
explicitly asks you to do so. Wrong usage can result in incorrect
monitoring data.

2424
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2425
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2426
Channel Description

Volume Status The status of a volume

§ Up status : Converting SHR to Pool, Data Scrubbing, Deploying,

186

Expanding Unfinished SHR, Migrating SHR to Pool, Migrating SHR1 to

SHR2, Mounting Cache, Normal, Parity Checking, Undeploying,
Unmounting Cache
§ Warning status: Assembling, Creating, Expanding, Migrating, Repairing,
Syncing
§ Down status: Canceling, Crashed, Degrade, Deleting, Unknown

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2427
7.8.217 SNMP Synology Physical Disk Sensor
The SNMP Synology Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk in a Synology network-attached
storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Synology Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2433 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP-Synology Fysieke Schijf

§ French: Synology disque physique (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Synology Physikalischer Datenträger

§ Japanese: SNMP Synology

§ Portuguese: Disco físico Synology (SNMP)

§ Russian: Физический диск Synology п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Synology

§ Spanish: Disco físico Synology (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2428
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Synology NAS Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2429
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpsynology

§ synology

§ physicaldisk

Synology NAS Settings

Setting Description

Disk Name Shows the name of the disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2430
Setting Description

Model Shows the model of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Type Shows the type of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2431
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2432
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Disk Status The disk status

§ Up status 186 : Initialized, Normal
§ Warning status: NotInitialized

§ Down status: Crashed, SystemPartitionFailed

Temperature The temperature

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2433
7.8.218 SNMP Synology System Health Sensor
The SNMP Synology System Health sensor monitors the system health of a Synology network-attached
storage (NAS) via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Synology System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2438 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP-Synology Systeem Status

§ French: Synology état ?

du système (SNMP)
§ German: SNMP Synology Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SNMP Synology

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema Synology (SNMP)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы Synology п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Synology

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema Synology (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2434
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ See the Knowledge Base: Why does my Synology System Health sensor show incorrect CPU and
memory values?

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2435
Setting Description

§ snmpsynology

§ synology

§ systemhealth

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2436
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2437
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Fan Status The CPU fan status

§ Up status 186 : Normal
§ Down status: Failed

CPU Load The CPU load in percent

For more information about the shown memory and CPU load values,
see the Knowledge Base: Why does my Synology System Health
sensor show incorrect CPU and memory values?

Memory Free The free memory in percent

For more information about the shown memory and CPU load values,
see the Knowledge Base: Why does my Synology System Health
sensor show incorrect CPU and memory values?

Power Status The power status

§ Up status: Normal

§ Down status: Failed

System Fan Status The system fan status

§ Up status: Normal

§ Down status: Failed

2438
Channel Description

System Status The system status

§ Up status: Normal

§ Down status: Failed

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Temperature The temperature

More
Knowledge Base

Why does my Synology System Health sensor show incorrect CPU and memory values?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/63283

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2439
7.8.219 SNMP System Uptime Sensor
The SNMP System Uptime sensor monitors the uptime of a device via the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP System Uptime Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2443 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Systeem Uptime

§ French: Disponibilité du système (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Laufzeit

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Tempo de atividade do sistema (SNMP)

§ Russian: Врем я бесп еребо йн о й рабо ты систем ы п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Tiempo activo sistema (SNMP)

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ See the Knowledge Base: Why does the SNMP System Uptime sensor report wrong values?

2440
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpuptimesensor

2441
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2442
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2443
Channel Description

System Uptime The system uptime

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

Why does the SNMP System Uptime sensor report wrong values?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61249

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2444
7.8.220 SNMP Traffic Sensor
The SNMP Traffic sensor monitors traffic on a device via the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).

You can create the sensor on a device that provides traffic data.

SNMP Traffic Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2452 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Verkeer

§ French: Trafic (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Datenverkehr

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Tráfego (SNMP)

§ Russian: Траф ик п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Tráfico (SNMP)

Remarks
§ You can define the displayed sensor name with port name templates in the SNMP compatibility
options 571 of the parent device.

2445
§ We recommend that you select SNMP v2c (most common) or SNMP v3 in the credentials for SNMP
devices 548 of the parent device (if supported by the target device). SNMP v1 does not support 64-bit
counters, which may result in invalid data. For details, see the Knowledge Base: SNMP Traffic sensor
suddenly drops at 610Mbps
§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ The auto-discovery always creates SNMP Traffic sensors for all interfaces whose SNMP traffic
269

counters are above 0. As a result, every interface that has had traffic since the last restart of the target
device is added, even if it is currently disconnected or disabled. For details, see the Knowledge Base:
How does auto-discovery with SNMP Traffic sensors work?
§ See the Knowledge Base: SNMP Traffic sensors when the device changes them

§ See the Knowledge Base: Where is the volume line in graphs?

Traffic Specific

Setting Description

Interface Number Select the ports on SNMP devices with multiple interfaces that you want
to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for each port that you select.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
You can see the connection status of an interface in the respective
table column.
You can select interfaces and cancel the selection by clicking Select
all connected interfaces, Select all disconnected interfaces, and
Deselect all interfaces.

Name for Traffic In For the standard channel Traffic In, enter the channel name here. The
Channel sensor shows it in graphs and tables. You can change this description
and the description of all other channels in the channel settings 3052 later.

Name for Traffic Out For the standard channel Traffic Out, enter the channel name here. The
Channel sensor shows it in graphs and tables. You can change this description
and the description of all other channels in the channel settings later.

2446
Setting Description

Name for Traffic Total For the standard channel Traffic Total, enter the channel name here. The
Channel sensor shows it in graphs and tables. You can change this description
and the description of all other channels in the channel settings later.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ bandwidthsensor

§ snmptrafficsensor

2447
Setting Description

Traffic Specific

2448
Setting Description

Interface Number Shows the number and name of the interface in the physical device that
this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. We strongly

recommend that you only change it if the Paessler support team
explicitly asks you to do so. Wrong usage can result in incorrect
monitoring data.

Additional Channels By default, each SNMP Traffic sensor creates the channels Traffic In,
Traffic Out, and Traffic Total. Select additional channels for all interfaces.
Click the respective channel names to mark the channels and to monitor
their data.
You can choose between the following additional channels:
§ Errors in and Errors out: The number of incoming and outgoing packets
that could not be delivered because of errors.
§ Discards in and Discards out: The number of discarded incoming and
outgoing packets even though no errors have been detected.
§ Unicast packets in Unicast packets out: The number of unicast packets
that have been delivered.
§ Non Unicast packets in and Non Unicast packets out (32-bit only): The
number of non-unicast packets that have been delivered.
§ Multicast packets in and Multicast packets out (64-bit only): The
number of delivered packets that were addressed to a multicast
address.
§ Broadcast packets in and Broadcast packets out (64-bit only): The
number of delivered packets that were addressed to a broadcast
address
§ Unknown Protocols: The number of received packets that were
discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
You cannot delete additional channels later. You can only disable
them.
If the sensor shows the Warning status 186 with the message
Channels not available, you can disable the affected channels to
remove the warning.

Connection Status Define how PRTG reacts when an interface is operational. An interface
Handling that is not operational is, for example, an Ethernet port on a switch with
no cable plugged in. This setting is valid for all selected interfaces.
Choose between:
§ Show down status for all disconnected states: Show the Down status
for a disconnected interface. This applies if the ifOperStatus of the
interface is not "up".
§ Show down status when disconnected, ignore when deactivated: Show
the Down status for a disconnected interface only if it is not deliberately
deactivated in the configuration. This applies if the ifOperStatus of the
interface is not "up" and the ifAdminStatus is "up". So the sensor stays 2449
in the Up status when the interface has been deactivated.
§ Ignore all disconnected states: Show the Up status.
Monitoring is discontinued without notice.
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

other to create a multi-channel graph. This generates a graph that
visualizes the different components of your total traffic.
You cannot use this option in combination with manual Vertical
Axis Scaling (available in the channel settings 3052 ).
§ Show in and out traffic as positive and negative area graph: Show
channels for incoming and outgoing traffic as positive and negative area
graph. This visualizes your traffic in a clear way.
You cannot use this option in combination with manual Vertical
Axis Scaling (available in the channel settings). Manual scaling is
not possible if you choose this option.
You cannot show a positive/negative graph for a channel if you
choose to display its data in percent of maximum (available in the
channel settings).

2450
For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

2451
Channel Unit Configuration

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Discards In The number of incoming discards per second

Discards Out The number of outgoing discards per second

Errors In The number of incoming errors per second

Errors Out The number of outgoing errors per second

Non-Unicast In The number of incoming non-unicast packets per second

Non-Unicast Out The number of outgoing non-unicast packets per second

Traffic In The incoming traffic in bytes per second

Traffic Out The outgoing traffic in bytes per second

Traffic Total The total traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

2452
Channel Description

Unicast In The number of incoming unicast packets per second

Unit The number of outgoing unicast packets per second

Unknown Protocols In The number of incoming, unknown protocols per second

More
Knowledge Base

How does auto-discovery with SNMP Traffic sensors work?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/85407

SNMP Traffic sensors when the device changes them

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/25893

Where is the volume line in graphs?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61272

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

SNMP Traffic sensor suddenly drops at 610Mbps

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/67503

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2453
7.8.221 SNMP Trap Receiver Sensor
The SNMP Trap Receiver sensor receives and analyzes Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
traps.

The sensor can also show the actual trap messages.

SNMP Trap Receiver Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2463 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Trap-ontvanger

§ French: Récepteur de Trap (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP-Trap-Empfänger

§ Japanese: SNMP

§ Portuguese: Receptor de trap SNMP

§ Russian: П рием н ик ло вуш ек SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP

§ Spanish: Receptor de trap SNMP

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor does not support SNMP v3 traps. Use SNMP v1 or v2c instead.

§ This sensor only supports the User Datagram Protocol (UDP).

2454
§ Add this sensor to the probe device to receive all messages of the remote probe system.

§ Add this sensor to a specific device to directly receive all messages from this device. This makes this
sensor faster than when you use source filters.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ You can use specific placeholders in email notification templates 3182 to see the messages when you

receive an email notification. See section List of Placeholders for Notifications 3704 .
§ The sensor states of this sensor persist for one scanning interval only. After showing a Warning
186

status or a Down status, and if there is no warning or error message in the following scanning interval,
the sensor shows an Up status again. For a workaround, see the Knowledge Base: How can I
configure sensors using speed limits to keep the status for more than one interval?
§ With the available filter options, you can individually define which types of messages the sensor
considers for monitoring, and which messages it categorizes as warning or error messages.
Depending on the filters, received messages are counted in the respective channels.
§ If you do not add the sensor to a probe device but to a different device in PRTG, be careful with the
configuration: Ensure that the IP address or Domain Name System (DNS) name of the parent device
matches the proper sender. For example, if you want to receive messages from a storage area
network (SAN), you might need to add a device to PRTG using the IP address of a specific array
member that sends the messages. Providing a DNS name that points to the IP address of a whole
group might not work for SANs.
§ In PRTG Network Monitor, you can copy the Management Information Base (MIB) file for your traps
into the \MIB subfolder of the PRTG program directory 3579 to translate the object identifiers (OID) for
the traps into readable messages. For details, see the Knowledge Base: How can I show the name of
a received OID in PRTG?
§ You cannot use this sensor in cluster mode. You can only set it up on a local probe or a remote probe
but not on a cluster probe.
§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I test an SNMP Trap Receiver sensor?

§ For a general introduction to the receiver's configuration, see section Monitoring Syslogs and SNMP
Traps 3390 .

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

To import MIB files into PRTG Hosted Monitor, see section Manage a PRTG Hosted Monitor
Subscription 81 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2455
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmptrapsensor

SNMP Trap Specific

2456
Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port on which the sensor listens for SNMP traps.
The default port is 162. Enter an integer.
We recommend that you use the default value.

Purge Messages After Define for how long PRTG stores received trap messages for analysis.
Choose a period of time from the dropdown list.

Filter
For detailed information, see section Filter Rules 2461 .

Filter

2457
Setting Description

Include Filter Define if you want to filter traps. If you leave this field empty or use the
keyword any, the sensor processes all data. To include only specific
types of traps, define filters using a special syntax.

Exclude Filter Define which types of traps the sensor discards and does not process. To
exclude specific types of traps, define filters using a special syntax.

Warning Filter Define which types of traps count for the Warnings channel. To categorize
received traps as warning messages, define filters using a special syntax.
The sensor collects messages until a scanning interval ends. As long
as the scanning interval is running, no status change happens. By
default, the sensor changes to the Warning status 186 after a scanning
interval finishes and there was at least one warning message (and no error
message) during this scanning interval. The sensor shows the Warning
status at least until the succeeding scanning interval finishes. If the
sensor does not receive any warning or error message in this scanning
interval, its status changes to the Up status again with the start of the
next scanning interval.

Error Filter Define which types of traps count for the Errors channel. To categorize
received traps as error messages, define filters using a special syntax.
The sensor collects messages until a scanning interval ends. As long
as the scanning interval is running, no status change happens. By
default, the sensor changes to the Down status after a scanning interval
finishes and there was at least one error message during this scanning
interval. The sensor shows the Down status at least until the succeeding
scanning interval finishes. If the sensor does not receive any warning or
error message in this scanning interval, its status changes to the Up
status again with the start of the next scanning interval.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2458
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2459
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2460
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result (recommended): Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\debug subfolder of
the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Sensor [ID]_[Date].log. This setting is for debugging purposes.
Use with caution. We recommend that you only use this setting for
a short time because it can create huge data files.

Filter Rules
Filter rules are used for the include, exclude, warning, and error definition fields of the SNMP Trap
Receiver sensor. They are based on the following format:
field[filter]

You can use include and exclude filters to define which traps to monitor or use warning and error filters to
define how to categorize received traps. Provide these filters in the sensor settings as formulas.
Formulas are fields that you can combine with boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT) and brackets.

Field Parameter Examples

source[ip] Enter an IP address where the UDPs come from. IP source[10.0.23.50],

masks and ranges 3540 are also possible. source[10.0.23.10-50],
source[10.0.23.10/24]
agent[ip] Enter an IP address that specifies the object that creates agent[10.0.0.1]
the SNMP trap.
agent[ip] only supports v1.
enterprise[oid] Enter an OID that specifies the object that originates the enterprise[1.3.6.1.4.1.2.6.182.
trap. 1.2.31.1.0]
enterprise[oid] only supports v1.
bindings[text] Enter a substring to match all OIDs and values in the bindings[ERROR],
bindings. bindings[1.3.6.1.4.1.2.6.182.1.
2.31.1.0],
bindings["port blocked"]

2461
Field Parameter Examples

It is not necessary to use

quotation marks (") to find
strings. If the string contains
quotation marks that you want
to include in the filter, you
need to escape them with
quotation marks.

bindings Enter an OID and a substring to match a value in the bindings[1.3.6.1.4.1.2.6.182.1.

[oid,value] specified OID. Separate the OID and the value with a 2.31.1.0,error]
comma.
bindings Enter an OID, a substring, and a mode to match a value bindings[1.3.6.1.4.1.2.6.182.1.
[oid,value,mode]in the specified OID. Separate the OID, the value, and the 2.31.1.0,error,exact]
mode with a comma. The mode can be: bindings[1.3.6.1.4.1.2.6.182.1.
2.31.1.0,10,equal]
§ substring: This is the default mode that works like
bindings[oid,value].
§ exact: This mode enforces an exact match of a value.

§ equal, greater, greaterorequal, less, or lessorequal:

This interprets and compares values as numbers.
This mode only supports integers without extra
characters and without thousands separators.
It also supports hex format.
gentrap[number]Enter a number that specifies the generic trap type. gentrap[3], gentrap[2-6]
You can also enter ranges.
spectrap Enter a number that defines the specific trap code. spectrap[4], spectrap[0-3]
[number]
You can also enter ranges.
version[number] Enter a number (1 or 2) that specifies the SNMP version. version[1], version[2]

community[text]Enter a community string for an exact, case-sensitive community[public],

match. community[private]

Messages Tab: Review and Analyze Traps

PRTG stores received traps as common files in the \Trap Database subfolder of the PRTG data directory.
To review and analyze all received messages, you can directly access the most recent data in a table
list 222 in the PRTG web interface. You can access this list via the sensor's Overview tab.

PRTG only shows received traps in the table on the Overview tab after an (automatic) page refresh
following a sensor scan. The default value for auto refresh 3172 is 30 seconds.

For more details and further filter options, click the Messages tab of the SNMP Trap Receiver sensor.
You see all received messages in a table list. At the top, you have display filter options to drill down into
the data for specific events of your interest. The filters are the same as those that are available in the
sensor settings, but you can define them without using formulas. Provide the desired parameters and
PRTG automatically loads the filtered list.

2462
PRTG automatically applies boolean operators to the filters in the following manner: parameters
across all columns are combined with AND, and parameters within a single column are combined
with OR.

The parameters that you enter in the filters must exactly match the parameters in the message.
They are case sensitive.

You can automatically add a filter by clicking the content of a column.

Advanced Filter Settings

You can open advanced filter settings by clicking in the Filter row. The Advanced Filter appears in a
popup window. In the text field, you can define a filter using the syntax as described in section Filter
Rules 2461 .

If you provided filter parameters on the Messages tab, the advanced filter already includes them as a
corresponding formula with the correct syntax. You can adjust this filter to your needs. You can also
copy the automatically created and manually adjusted formula for usage in the filter fields of the sensor
settings.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Drops The number of dropped packets per second on the SNMP trap collector
port

Errors The number of messages categorized as "error" per second

Messages The overall number of received traps per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Warnings The number of messages categorized as "warning" per second

More
Knowledge Base

How can I configure sensors using speed limits to keep the status for more than one interval?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73212

2463
How can I show the name of a received OID in PRTG?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/63562

How do I test an SNMP Trap Receiver sensor?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/10193

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2464
7.8.222 SNMP Windows Service Sensor
The SNMP Windows Service sensor monitors a Windows service via the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).

SNMP Window s Service Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2469 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNMP Windows Service

§ French: Windows service (SNMP)

§ German: SNMP Windows-Dienst

§ Japanese: SNMP Windows

§ Portuguese: Serviço Windows (SNMP)

§ Russian: Служба Windows п о SNMP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNMP Windows

§ Spanish: Servicio Windows (SNMP)

Remarks
§ This sensor cannot distinguish the status "not installed" from "not running".

§ It might not work to query data from a probe device via SNMP (querying localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1).
Add this device to PRTG 351 with the IP address that it has in your network and create the SNMP
sensor on this device instead.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

2465
§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SNMP Windows Service Monitor

Setting Description

services Select the services that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor
for each service that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2466
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ snmpservicesensor

§ servicesensor

SNMP Windows Service Monitor

SNMP Window s Service Monitor

Setting Description

Service Shows the Windows service that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2467
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2468
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2469
Channel Description

Operating State The operating status of the target device

§ Up status 186 : Active

§ Down status: Continue-Pending, Pause-Pending, Paused

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What SNMP sensors does PRTG offer?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75522

My SNMP sensors don’t work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/46863

2470
7.8.223 SNTP Sensor
The SNTP sensor monitors a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server.

The sensor tries to get a valid time stamp from the server up to three times per scan until it reports
an error.

SNTP Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2475 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SNTP

§ French: SNTP

§ German: SNTP

§ Japanese: SNTP

§ Portuguese: SNTP

§ Russian: SNTP

§ Simplified Chinese: SNTP

§ Spanish: SNTP

Remarks
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a low performance impact.

2471
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sntpsensor

2472
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Specific

Setting Description

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2473
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2474
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Difference The time difference in comparison to the local system time

Response Time The response time in msec

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2475
7.8.224 Soffico Orchestra Channel Health Sensor
The Soffico Orchestra Channel Health sensor monitors the state and the overall number of successful or
unsuccessful channel calls.

Soffico Orchestra Channel Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2482 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ French: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ German: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ Japanese: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ Portuguese: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ Russian: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ Simplified Chinese: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

§ Spanish: Soffico Orchestra Channel Health

Remarks
§ This sensor requires a Soffico license and Orchestra 4.8.2.5 or later.

§ You can define credentials for Soffico Orchestra 565 in settings that are higher in the object

hierarchy 140 , for example, in the settings of the parent device.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

2476
§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Orchestra Channel Specific

Setting Description

Channel Name Select the Orchestra channels that you want to monitor. PRTG creates
one sensor for each channel that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2477
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ orchestra

§ orchestrachannelhealth

§ soffico

Orchestra Channel Specific

Setting Description

Channel Name Shows the name of the Orchestra channel that this sensor monitors.
The channel name consists of the Orchestra scenario, a slash, and
the Orchestra channel name.

2478
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Type Shows the type of the Orchestra channel that this sensor monitors.
The sensor supports inbound and outbound channels.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2479
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Result of Sensor [ID].log. This setting is for debugging purposes. PRTG
overwrites this file with each scanning interval.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval
The recommended scanning interval of this sensor is 5 minutes.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

2480
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window
You cannot interrupt the inheritance for schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. The
corresponding settings from the parent objects are always active. However, you can define additional
schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. They are active at the same time as the parent
objects' settings.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2481
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Adapter State The adapter state

§ Up status 186 : Offline, Online

§ Warning status: Not Installed, Unknown

§ Down status: Online With Error

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Error Count The number of errors per second

OK Count The number of OKs per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

2482
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2483
7.8.225 SSH Disk Free Sensor
The SSH Disk Free sensor monitors the free space on disks of a Linux/Unix system using Secure Shell
(SSH).

The free space that this sensor returns shows the available disk space of the volume, minus a
reserve defined for this volume (for example, for redundancy purposes). So, this sensor shows the
disk space that is actually available for use. The size of the reserved disk space can be defined with
tune2fs. For details, see the Knowledge Base: Why do SSH Disk Free and SNMP Linux Disk Free show
different values for my target Linux system?

SSH Disk Free Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2494 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Disk vrij

§ French: Espace disponible du disque (SSH)

§ German: SSH Laufwerkskapazität

§ Japanese: SSH

§ Portuguese: Disco livre (SSH)

§ Russian: Сво бо дн о е п ро стран ство диска п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH

§ Spanish: Espacio libre en disco (SSH)

2484
Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SSH Disk Free

Setting Description

Disk Select the disks that you want to monitor. PRTG creates two channels for
each disk that you select.
You can select up to 100 disks. If you select more disks, you cannot
create the sensor. Add the sensor multiple times to monitor more
than 100 disks with several sensors.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2485
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshdiskfreesensor

§ diskfreesensor

2486
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

2487
Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file names are
Result of Sensor [ID].txt, Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt, and Result of
Sensor [ID] (SSHv2).txt. This setting is for debugging purposes. PRTG
overwrites these files with each scanning interval.

§ Store result in case of error: Store the last sensor result only if the
sensor shows the Down status.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Set Limits Checkes for ALL Disks

In this section, you can set limits that are valid for all channels and all drives. By entering limits, you can
define when the sensor shows the Warning or the Down status 186 , depending on the data provided by all
drives that this sensor monitors. If you want to individually define limits for separate channels, use the
limit settings in the channel settings 3052 .

All limits that you define here are valid in addition to the limits defined in the particular Channel
settings. The limits are valid simultaneously, so the first limit that is breached applies.

2488
Set Limits Checkes for ALL Disks

Setting Description

2489
Setting Description

Lower Error Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify a lower limit in percent for the
Down status. If the free disk space of one of your drives falls below this
value, the sensor changes to the Down status. Enter an integer or leave
the field empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

2490
Setting Description

Lower Warning Limit This setting is only visible if you select Use the limits of both the sensor
and the channel settings above. Specify a lower limit. Use the same unit
as shown by the free bytes channels of this sensor (by default this is MB).
If the free disk space of one of your drives falls below this value, the
sensor changes to the Warning status. Enter an integer or leave the field
empty.
The limits that you set here are valid for all channels of this sensor.
You can additionally set individual limits for each channel in the
channel settings. Both the limits that you set here and in the channel
settings are valid simultaneously.

§ Activate alarm: Send an alert if a monitored disk is removed or not

found.

2491
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2492
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2493
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Free Bytes [Mounted The free space in bytes

Partition]

Free Space [Mounted The free space in percent

Partition]

Total The total space in bytes

More
Knowledge Base

Why do SSH Disk Free and SNMP Linux Disk Free show different values for my target Linux system?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/43183

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

2494
What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

How do I set up SSH sensors with my AWS Linux instances?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79569

2495
7.8.226 SSH INodes Free Sensor
The SSH INodes Free sensor monitors the free index nodes on disks of Linux/Unix and macOS systems
via Secure Shell (SSH).

SSH INodes Free Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2502 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH INodes Vrij

§ French: INodes disponibles (SSH)

§ German: SSH Freie INodes

§ Japanese: SSH inode

§ Portuguese: INodes livre (SSH)

§ Russian: Сво бо дн ы е узлы INodes п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH INode

§ Spanish: INodes libres (SSH)

2496
Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor does not support ESX(i) hosts.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2497
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshinodesfreesensor

SSH Specific

Setting Description

2498
Setting Description

Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

2499
Setting Description

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2500
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2501
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

2502
Channel Description

Free INodes [Mount] The free index nodes in percent for the mount
UNIX file systems only allow a limited number of index nodes. If the
limit is exceeded, no more data can be stored, although free space
might still be available. This sensor informs you before one of your drives
runs out of INodes.

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

How do I set up SSH sensors with my AWS Linux instances?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79569

2503
7.8.227 SSH Load Average Sensor
The SSH Load Average sensor monitors the load average of a Linux/Unix system using Secure Shell
(SSH).

SSH Load Average Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2510 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Gemiddelde belasting

§ French: Charge moyenne (SSH)

§ German: SSH Durchschnittliche Last

§ Japanese: SSH

§ Portuguese: Carga média (SSH)

§ Russian: Средн яя загрузка п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH

§ Spanish: Promedio de carga (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

2504
§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshloadavgsensor

2505
Setting Description

SSH Specific

Setting Description

2506
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

2507
Setting Description

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2508
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2509
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

1 Minute The average system load within a 1-minute interval

This channel is the primary channel by default.

5 Minutes The average system load within a 5-minute scanning interval

15 Minutes The average system load within a 15-minute interval

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2510
How do I set up SSH sensors with my AWS Linux instances?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79569

2511
7.8.228 SSH Meminfo Sensor
The SSH Meminfo sensor monitors the memory usage of a Linux/Unix system using Secure Shell
(SSH).

SSH Meminfo Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2518 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Meminfo

§ French: Information mémoire (SSH)

§ German: SSH Speicherinfo

§ Japanese: SSH

§ Portuguese: Meminfo (SSH)

§ Russian: Meminfo п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH

§ Spanish: Meminfo (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix distributions.

§ This sensor does not support any macOS distributions.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

2512
§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshmeminfosensor

§ memorysensor

2513
Setting Description

SSH Specific

Setting Description

2514
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

2515
Setting Description

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2516
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2517
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available Memory The available memory in bytes

Percent Available The available memory in percent

Memory
This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

How do I set up SSH sensors with my AWS Linux instances?

2518
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79569

2519
7.8.229 SSH Remote Ping Sensor
The SSH Remote Ping sensor remotely monitors the connectivity between a system running
Linux/macOS X and another device, using Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo requests
(Ping) and Secure Shell (SSH).

SSH Remote Ping Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2526 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Remote Ping

§ French: Ping distant (SSH)

§ German: SSH Remote Ping

§ Japanese: SSH Ping

§ Portuguese: Ping remoto (SSH)

§ Russian: Удален н ы й п ин г п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH Ping

§ Spanish: Ping remoto (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

2520
§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshremotepingsensor

2521
Setting Description

§ pingsensor

§ remotepingsensor

SSH Remote Ping Configuration

Setting Description

Target Enter the Domain Name System (DNS) name or IP address of the target
device the Ping is sent to. The sensor remotely connects to the parent
device it is created on via SSH, then performs a ping request from this
remote device to the target device or server. Enter a string.

Packet Size (Bytes) Enter the packet size for the Ping in bytes. You can enter any value
between 1 and 10000. Enter an integer.
We recommend that you use the default value.

Packet Count Enter the number of packets that the sensor sends with each scanning
interval.

Custom Parameter Optionally, enter additional parameters that the sensor adds at the end of
the Ping command. Enter a string or leave the field empty.

2522
Setting Description

Do not use parameters that change the output format of the result to
ensure that it can still be parsed. You cannot enter an additional
command.

SSH Specific

Setting Description

2523
Setting Description

§ Enter custom port number: Define a custom port number below and do
not use the port number from the parent device settings.

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2524
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2525
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2526
Channel Description

Avg Response The average response time measured from the remote device in
milliseconds (msec)

Max Response The maximum response time measured from the remote device in msec

Min Response The minimum response time measured from the remote device in msec

Packet Loss The packet loss in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

How do I set up SSH sensors with my AWS Linux instances?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79569

2527
7.8.230 SSH SAN Enclosure Sensor
The SSH SAN Enclosure sensor monitors a storage area network (SAN) enclosure via Secure Shell
(SSH).

The SAN must provide a command-line interface (CLI) for this purpose.

SSH SAN Enclosure Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2535 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH SAN behuizing

§ French: SAN boîtier (SSH)

§ German: SSH SAN Enclosure

§ Japanese: SSH SAN

§ Portuguese: Gabinete SAN (SSH)

§ Russian: Ко рп ус SAN п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH SAN

§ Spanish: Gabinete SAN (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.

2528
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

§ This sensor does not support every SAN, even if it provides a CLI. The sensor only works with specific
devices, for example, the HPE P2000.
§ It might happen that the controller of your target device breaks down. Experience shows that this issue
strongly depends on the hardware model you monitor. Increase the scanning interval to discharge the
controller and try again.
§ After a firmware update of the target device, this sensor might show incorrect channel values. Add this
sensor anew in this case.
§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ Sometimes the devices you monitor with this SSH SAN sensor return status values that are not
officially documented so that the shown sensor status in PRTG differs from the "real" device status.
For more information on this issue, see the Knowledge Base: Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a
wrong status?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SSH SAN Enclosure Settings

Setting Description

Storage Enclosure Select the storage enclosures that you want to monitor. PRTG creates
one sensor for each storage enclosure that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2529
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshsanenclosure

§ sshsan

§ enclosure

2530
SSH SAN Enclosure Settings

SSH SAN Enclosure Settings

Setting Description

Storage Enclosure Shows the identifier of the storage enclosure that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Durable ID Shows the durable identifier of the storage enclosure that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Name Shows the name of the storage enclosure that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

WWN Shows the World Wide Name (WWN) of the storage enclosure that this
sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2531
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Shell Timeout (Sec.) Define a timeout in seconds for the shell response. This is the time in
seconds the sensor waits for the shell to return a response after it has
sent its specific command (for example, cat /proc/loadavg). The maximum
value is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the shell timeout is a value that is lower than the
connection timeout to avoid potential errors.

2532
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2533
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2534
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2535
Channel Description

Controller[#] The status of the controller

§ Up status: Ok

§ Down status: Fault, Not Available

Enclosure[#] The overall status of the enclosure

§ Up status: Ok

§ Down status: Fault, Not Available

This channel is the primary channel by default.

PSU[#] The status of the power supplies

§ Up status: Ok

§ Down status: Fault, Not Available

More
Knowledge Base

Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a wrong status?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60145

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2536
7.8.231 SSH SAN Logical Disk Sensor
The SSH SAN Logical Disk sensor monitors a logical disk on a storage area network (SAN) via Secure
Shell (SSH).

The SAN must provide a command-line interface (CLI) for this purpose.

SSH SAN Logical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2545 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH SAN Logische Schijf

§ French: SAN disque logique (SSH)

§ German: SSH SAN Logisches Laufwerk

§ Japanese: SSH SAN

§ Portuguese: Disco lógico SAN (SSH)

§ Russian: Ло гический диск SAN п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH SAN

§ Spanish: Disco lógico SAN (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor does not support every SAN, even if it provides a CLI. The sensor only works with specific
devices, for example, the HPE P2000.

2537
§ It might happen that the controller of your target device breaks down. Experience shows that this issue
strongly depends on the hardware model you monitor. Increase the scanning interval to discharge the
controller and try again.
§ After a firmware update of the target device, this sensor might show incorrect channel values. Add this
sensor anew in this case.
§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ Sometimes the devices you monitor with this SSH SAN sensor return status values that are not
officially documented so that the shown sensor status in PRTG differs from the "real" device status.
For more information on this issue, see the Knowledge Base: Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a
wrong status?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SSH SAN Logical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2538
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshsanlogicaldisk

§ sshsan

§ logicaldisk

2539
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Shell Timeout (Sec.) Define a timeout in seconds for the shell response. This is the time in
seconds the sensor waits for the shell to return a response after it has
sent its specific command (for example, cat /proc/loadavg). The maximum
value is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the shell timeout is a value that is lower than the
connection timeout to avoid potential errors.

2540
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2541
SSH SAN Logical Disk Settings

SSH SAN Logical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Volume Shows the volume that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Size Shows the size of the volume that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

§ Advanced: Monitor additional data on the target device like IOs and
bandwidth.
Because this setting results in higher usage of system resources
and so might cause sensor instabilities, we strongly recommend
that you ony select this option if this data is crucial for the volume that
you monitor.

Sensor Display

2542
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2543
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2544
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Health The health status of the disk

§ Up status: Ok

§ Down status: Fault, Not Available

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Total IOs The total number of input/output (I/O) operations per second

Transferred The data transferred per second

More
Knowledge Base

Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a wrong status?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60145

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2545
7.8.232 SSH SAN Physical Disk Sensor
The SSH SAN Physical Disk sensor monitors a physical disk on a storage area network (SAN) via
Secure Shell (SSH).

The SAN must provide a command-line interface (CLI) for this purpose.

SSH SAN Physical Disk Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2554 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH SAN Fysieke Schijf

§ French: SAN disque physique (SSH)

§ German: SSH SAN Physikalisches Laufwerk

§ Japanese: SSH SAN

§ Portuguese: Disco físico SAN (SSH)

§ Russian: Физический диск SAN п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH SAN

§ Spanish: Disco físico SAN (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

2546
§ This sensor does not support every SAN, even if it provides a CLI. The sensor only works with specific
devices, for example, the HPE P2000.

§ It might happen that the controller of your target device breaks down. Experience shows that this issue
strongly depends on the hardware model you monitor. Increase the scanning interval to discharge the
controller and try again.
§ After a firmware update of the target device, this sensor might show incorrect channel values. Add this
sensor anew in this case.
§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ Sometimes the devices you monitor with this SSH SAN sensor return status values that are not
officially documented so that the shown sensor status in PRTG differs from the "real" device status.
For more information on this issue, see the Knowledge Base: Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a
wrong status?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SSH SAN Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2547
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshsanphysicaldisk

§ sshsan

§ physicaldisk

2548
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Shell Timeout (Sec.) Define a timeout in seconds for the shell response. This is the time in
seconds the sensor waits for the shell to return a response after it has
sent its specific command (for example, cat /proc/loadavg). The maximum
value is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the shell timeout is a value that is lower than the
connection timeout to avoid potential errors.

2549
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2550
SSH SAN Physical Disk Settings

SSH SAN Physical Disk Settings

Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Name Shows the name of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Size Shows the size of the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Command Mode Define the command set that the sensor uses on the device to get
monitoring data:
§ Basic (recommended): Use the basic command set. We recommend
that you use the basic command set for best sensor performance. This
setting is appropriate for most scenarios.
§ Advanced: Monitor additional data on the target device like IOs and
bandwidth.
Because this setting results in higher usage of system resources
and so might cause sensor instabilities, we strongly recommend
that you ony select this option if this data is crucial for the volume that
you monitor.

Request Mode Define the which type of data the sensor requests:

2551
Setting Description

§ Request all historical data: Use this mode to possibly deliver better
data.
§ Request actual counters: Use this mode if the device does not support
Request all historical data. This mode might result in incorrect data and
spikes in graphs.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:

§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2552
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2553
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Health The health status of the disk

§ Up status: Ok

§ Down status: Fault, Not Available

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Total IOs The total number of input/output (I/O) operations per second

Transferred The data transferred per second

2554
More
Knowledge Base

Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a wrong status?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60145

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2555
7.8.233 SSH SAN System Health Sensor
The SSH SAN System Health sensor monitors the system health of a storage area network (SAN) via
Secure Shell (SSH).

The SAN must provide a command-line interface (CLI) for this purpose.

SSH SAN System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2564 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH SAN systeemstatus

§ French: SAN état du système (SSH)

§ German: SSH SAN Systemzustand

§ Japanese: SSH SAN

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema SAN (SSH)

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы SAN п о SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH SAN

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema SAN (SSH)

2556
Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.
§ This sensor does not support every SAN, even if it provides a CLI. The sensor only works with specific
devices, for example, the HPE P2000.
§ It might happen that the controller of your target device breaks down. Experience shows that this issue
strongly depends on the hardware model you monitor. Increase the scanning interval to discharge the
controller and try again.
§ After a firmware update of the target device, this sensor might show incorrect channel values. Add this
sensor anew in this case.
§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ This sensor uses lookups to determine the status values of one or more channels. This means that
possible states are defined in a lookup file. You can change the behavior of a channel by editing the
lookup file that the channel uses. For details, see section Define Lookups 3541 .
§ Sometimes the devices you monitor with this SSH SAN sensor return status values that are not
officially documented so that the shown sensor status in PRTG differs from the "real" device status.
For more information on this issue, see the Knowledge Base: Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a
wrong status?

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

SSH SAN Specific

Setting Description

Metrics Select the metrics that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for
each metric that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2557
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshsansystemhealth

§ sshsan

§ systemhealth

2558
SSH SAN Specific

SSH SAN Specific

Setting Description

Metric Shows the metric that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Monitoring Mode Define how the sensor requests data from the target device:
§ Automatic detection: Automatically detect the firmware version and use
the appropriate mode. We recommend that you use this option and only
explicitly define the firmware date if errors occur.
§ Firmware before June 2015: Use the mode that is appropriate for
firmware versions before June 2015.
§ Firmware as of June 2015: Use the mode that is appropriate for firmware
versions as of June 2015.
The required mode depends on the firmware version of the target
device. The sensor automatically detects the firmware version and
uses the appropriate mode in most cases. If errors occur, explicitly define
the firmware version.
We recommend that you use the default value.

2559
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Shell Timeout (Sec.) Define a timeout in seconds for the shell response. This is the time in
seconds the sensor waits for the shell to return a response after it has
sent its specific command (for example, cat /proc/loadavg). The maximum
value is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Enter an integer.
This sensor has a fixed timeout of 300 seconds. If you change the
value, it does not have an effect on the timeout.
Ensure that the shell timeout is a value that is lower than the
connection timeout to avoid potential errors.

2560
Setting Description

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2561
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2562
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2563
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Capacitor Cell [#] Voltage The capacitor cell voltage in volts (V)
[Controller]

Capacitor Cell [#] Voltage The capacitor cell voltage status

[Controller] Status
§ Up status 186 : Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

Capacitor Pack Voltage The capacitor pack voltage in V

[Controller]

Capacitor Pack Voltage The capacitor pack voltage status

[Controller] Status
§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

2564
Channel Description

Disk Controller Temp The disk controller temperature

[Controller]

Disk Controller Temp The disk controller temperature status

[Controller] Status
§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

Overall Unit Status The overall unit status

§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

Memory Controller Temp The memory controller temperature

[Controller]

Memory Controller Temp The memory controller temperature status

[Controller] Status
§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

On-Board Temperature The on-board temperature

[Controller]

On-Board Temperature The on-board temperature status

[Controller] Status
§ Up status: Ok

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Error, Unavailable, Unknown, Unrecoverable

§ Unknown status: Not Installed, Unsupported

2565
More
Knowledge Base

Why does my SSH SAN sensor show a wrong status?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60145

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2566
7.8.234 SSH Script Sensor
The SSH Script sensor connects to a Linux/Unix system via Secure Shell (SSH) and executes a script
file that is located on the target system. This option is available as part of the PRTG API.

SSH Script Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2576 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Script

§ French: Script (SSH)

§ German: SSH-Skript

§ Japanese: SSH

§ Portuguese: Script (SSH)

§ Russian: Скрип т SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH

§ Spanish: Script (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ For security reasons, you must store your script file in the /var/prtg/scripts directory on the target
system. Make sure that the script has executable rights. If the script is not available or was deleted
from the directory, you get the error message Script not found (237).

2567
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ For details about the return value format, see section Custom Sensors 3498 .
§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Script Select a script file from the dropdown list. It shows all script files that are
available in the /var/prtg/scripts directory on the target Linux/Unix system.
For a script file to appear in this list, store the target file in this directory.
Make sure that the script has executable rights.
To show the expected sensor value and status 186 , your file must use
the correct format for the returned values. In this case, it is
exitcode:value:message to standard output stdout. The exit code
determines the sensor status.
For detailed information on how to create custom sensors and for the
return format, see section Custom Sensors 3498 .

For an example script, see the Knowledge Base: Is there a shell

script example for the SSH Script sensor?

Value Type Define the type of the values that your executable or script file returns:
§ Integer: An integer is expected as return value. If the script returns a
float, PRTG displays the value 0.
§ Float: A float is expected as return value, with a dot (.) between the
predecimal position and the decimal places.
The sensor also displays integers unless they produce a buffer
overflow.
§ Counter: Your script returns an integer that increases. PRTG shows the
difference between the values of two sensor scans.
A counter must return an integer. It does not support float values.
The sensor does not support string values.

Channel Name Enter a name for the channel. Enter a string. This is for display purposes
only.

2568
Setting Description

You can change this value later in the channel settings 3052 of this
sensor.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshscript

2569
Setting Description

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Script Shows the name of the script that the sensor executes with each
scanning interval.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Character Encoding Define the character encoding that you use in your script to correctly
display the sensor message:
§ UTF-8 (default)

§ ASCII

Parameters If your script file catches command-line parameters, define them here.
You can also use placeholders. Enter a string or leave the field empty.
For a full list of all placeholders, see section Custom Sensors 3508 .
You must escape special characters and whitespaces in your
parameters and surround them with double quotes. See section
Escape Special Characters and Whitespaces in Parameters 2576 for
details.

2570
Setting Description

In SSH scripts, you can use alphanumeric characters and the special
characters ".", "_", "-", "=", and "/" outside of quoted strings.

Mutex Name Define a mutual exclusion (mutex) name for the process. Enter a string or
leave the field empty.

PRTG runs all custom script sensors that have the same mutex
name serially (not simultaneously). This is useful if you use a lot of
sensors and want to avoid high resource usage caused by processes that
run running at the same time.
See the Knowledge Base: What is the Mutex Name in the EXE/Script
sensor settings?

Unit String Define a unit for the channel value. Enter a string. This is for display
purposes only and is the default unit for a new channel. You can change
the unit after sensor creation in the sensor's channel settings.

Value Type Shows the expected type of the returned value.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

2571
SSH Specific

SSH Specific

Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

2572
Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result in case of error: Store the last sensor result only if the
sensor shows the Down status.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2573
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2574
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2575
Escape Special Characters and Whitespaces in Parameters
You need to escape special characters in parameters that you pass to an executable or script and
surround them with quotation marks to make sure that the characters are correctly interpreted.
PowerShell scripts in particular require adequate escaping so that the parameters are passed in a valid
PowerShell syntax. PRTG automatically does most of the escaping for you.

Follow these rules to escape special characters and whitespaces in the parameters fields:

§ Use quotes for parameters that contain whitespaces.

-name "Mr John Q Public"
-name 'Mr John Q Public'

§ Use double quotes for parameters that contain single quotes.

-name "Mr 'John Q' Public"

§ Use single quotes for parameters that contain double quotes.

-name 'Mr "John Q" Public'

§ Use a backslash (\) to escape and pass a literal double quote.

-name pub\"lic

§ Use double quotes for parameters that contain double and single quotes and escape double quotes.
-name "pu'b\"lic"

In SSH scripts, you can use alphanumeric characters and the special characters ".", "_", "-", "=",
and "/" outside of quoted strings.

We recommend that you do not pass passwords in parameters. Use placeholders instead. See
section Custom Sensors 3509 for details.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Execution Time The execution time in milliseconds (msec)

This channel is the primary channel by default.

[Value] The value that the script file returns in one channel
For details about the return value format, see section Custom
Sensors 3498 .

2576
More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

Is there a shell script example for the SSH Script sensor?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/39513

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What is the Mutex Name in the EXE/Script sensor settings?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/6673

How can I test if parameters are correctly transmitted to my script when using an EXE/Script sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/11283

How can I show special characters with EXE/Script sensors?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64817

Why do I have to store SQL sensor queries and custom scripts in files on the probe computer?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75372

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

2577
7.8.235 SSH Script Advanced Sensor
The SSH Script Advanced sensor connects to a Linux/Unix system via Secure Shell (SSH) and
executes a script file that is located on the target system. This option is available as part of the PRTG
API.

SSH Script Advanced Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2586 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSH Script Geavanceerd

§ French: Script (SSH) avancé

§ German: SSH-Skript (Erweitert)

§ Japanese: SSH

§ Portuguese: Script (avançado) (SSH)

§ Russian: Расш ирен н ы й скрип т SSH

§ Simplified Chinese: SSH

§ Spanish: Script (avanzado) (SSH)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ For security reasons, you must store the script file in the /var/prtg/scriptsxml directory on the target
system. Make sure that the script has executable rights.

2578
§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

§ This sensor cannot support all Linux/Unix and macOS distributions.

§ This sensor does not officially support more than 50 channels. Depending on the data used with this
sensor, you might exceed the maximum number of supported channels. In this case, PRTG tries to
display all channels. Be aware, however, that you experience limited usability and performance.
§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

§ For details about the return value format, see section Custom Sensors 3499 .

§ See the Knowledge Base: SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Script Select a script file from the dropdown list. It shows all script files that are
available in the /var/prtg/scriptsxml directory on the target Linux/Unix
system. For a script file to appear in this list, store the target file in this
directory.
Make sure that the script has executable rights.
To show the expected sensor value and status 186 , your files must
return the expected XML or JSON format to standard output stdout.
The values and message must be embedded in the XML or JSON.

For detailed information on how to create custom sensors and for the
return format, see section Custom Sensors 3499 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2579
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sshscript

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Script Shows the script that the sensor executes with each scanning interval.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2580
Setting Description

Parameters If your script file catches command-line parameters, you can define them
here. You can use also placeholders. Enter a string or leave the field
empty.
For a full list of all placeholders, see section Custom Sensors 3508 .
You must escape special characters and whitespaces in your
parameters and surround them with double quotes. See section
Escape Special Characters and Whitespaces in Parameters 2585 for
details.
In SSH scripts, you can use alphanumeric characters and the special
characters ".", "_", "-", "=", and "/" outside of quoted strings.

Mutex Name Define a mutual exclusion (mutex) name for the process. Enter a string or
leave the field empty.
PRTG runs all custom script sensors that have the same mutex
name serially (not simultaneously). This is useful if you use a lot of
sensors and want to avoid high resource usage caused by processes that
run running at the same time.
See the Knowledge Base: What is the Mutex Name in the EXE/Script
sensor settings?

SSH Specific

2581
Setting Description

Connection Timeout Define a timeout in seconds for the connection. This is the time that the
(Sec.) sensor waits to establish a connection to the host. Keep this value as low
as possible. Enter an integer.
Ensure that the connection timeout is a value that is higher than the
shell timeout to avoid potential errors.

Use Port Number This setting is only visible if you select Enter custom port number above.
Enter the port number (between 1 and 65535) that this sensor uses for the
SSH connection. Enter an integer.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:

2582
Setting Description

§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result in case of error: Store the last sensor result only if the
sensor shows the Down status.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2583
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2584
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Escape Special Characters and Whitespaces in Parameters

You need to escape special characters in parameters that you pass to an executable or script and
surround them with quotation marks to make sure that the characters are correctly interpreted.
PowerShell scripts in particular require adequate escaping so that the parameters are passed in a valid
PowerShell syntax. PRTG automatically does most of the escaping for you.

Follow these rules to escape special characters and whitespaces in the parameters fields:

§ Use quotes for parameters that contain whitespaces.

-name "Mr John Q Public"
-name 'Mr John Q Public'

§ Use double quotes for parameters that contain single quotes.

2585
-name "Mr 'John Q' Public"

§ Use single quotes for parameters that contain double quotes.

-name 'Mr "John Q" Public'

§ Use a backslash (\) to escape and pass a literal double quote.

-name pub\"lic

§ Use double quotes for parameters that contain double and single quotes and escape double quotes.
-name "pu'b\"lic"

In SSH scripts, you can use alphanumeric characters and the special characters ".", "_", "-", "=",
and "/" outside of quoted strings.

We recommend that you do not pass passwords in parameters. Use placeholders instead. See
section Custom Sensors 3509 for details.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Execution Time The execution time in milliseconds (msec)

[Value] The values that the script file returns in several channels
For details about the return value format, see section Custom
Sensors 3499 .

More
Knowledge Base

SSH and SFTP sensors in Unknown status

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/79174

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

What is the Mutex Name in the EXE/Script sensor settings?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/6673

How can I test if parameters are correctly transmitted to my script when using an EXE/Script sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/11283

How can I show special characters with EXE/Script sensors?

2586
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64817

Why do I have to store SQL sensor queries and custom scripts in files on the probe computer?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/75372

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

2587
7.8.236 SSL Certificate Sensor
The SSL Certificate sensor monitors the certificate of a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport Layer
Security (TLS) secured connection.

The sensor also shows the certificate common name and the certificate thumbprint in the sensor
message.

SSL Certificate Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2595 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSL Certificaat

§ French: SSL certificat

§ German: SSL-Zertifikat

§ Japanese: SSL

§ Portuguese: Certificado SSL

§ Russian: Сертиф икат SSL

§ Simplified Chinese: SSL

§ Spanish: Certificado SSL

2588
Remarks
§ Enter the Domain Name System (DNS) name in the settings of the parent device 535 exactly as it is
written in your certificate. You can also use wildcards 2595 .
§ To check the revocation status of a certificate, the sensor uses WinHTTP to auto-detect the proxy
server to use. You can also manually define a server. If you do not define a proxy server, PRTG uses
the default WinHTTP proxy settings. For more information, see the Knowledge Base: How can I
configure the WinHTTP proxy settings for the SSL Certificate sensor?

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

This sensor supersedes the deprecated HTTP Certificate Expiry sensor.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2589
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ sslcertificate

§ ssl

§ certificate

Timeout (Sec.) Enter a timeout in seconds for the TCP read request. Enter an integer.
The maximum timeout value is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
If the reply takes longer than this value, the sensor cancels the
request and shows a corresponding error message.

SSL Certificate Specific

2590
Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port to which this sensor connects. Enter an
integer. The default port is 443.

Virtual Host (SNI Define the host name that the sensor tries to query if your server has
Domain) multiple certificates on the same IP address and port combination. Enter a
string.
In the case of virtual hosting, you must identify the specific certificate
for a specific domain while all domains use the same IP address, you
can use SNI, which is an extension of TLS.
If you select a Certificate Name Validation option below, the sensor
compares the common name and optionally alternative names with
the SNI. Leave this field empty to validate the common name with the host
address of the parent device.

Certificate Name Define if you want the sensor to validate the certificate name:
Validation
§ Do not compare common name (CN) with device address or SNI
(default): Do not check if the certificate name is valid by comparing it
with the address of the parent device or the defined SNI.
§ Compare and show down status if common name (CN) and address/SNI
do not match: Check the common name to validate the certificate
name. If you define an SNI above, the sensor compares the common
name with the SNI. If you do not define an SNI, the sensor uses the
host address of the parent device. If the common name and the
checked address/SNI do not match, the sensor shows the Down
status 186 .
§ Compare and show down status if common name (CN)/alternative
names (SAN) and address/SNI do not match: Check the common name
and the Subject Alternative Names (SAN) to validate the certificate. If
you define an SNI domain above, the sensor compares the common
name and alternative names with the SNI. If you do not define an SNI,
the sensor uses the host address of the parent device. If the common
name or alternative names and the checked address/SNI do not match,
the sensor shows the Down status.

Connection Specific

2591
Setting Description

SOCKS Proxy (v5 only) Define if the sensor uses a SOCKS proxy server for the sensor
connection:
§ Do not use SOCKS proxy (default): Directly connect to the target host
without using a SOCKS proxy.
§ Use SOCKS proxy: Connect using SOCKS5. Provide data for the
SOCKS connection below.
Other SOCKS versions are not supported.
This sensor only supports SOCKS5 proxies. It does not support
HTTP proxies.

Server This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. Enter
the IP address or host name of the proxy server that the sensor uses for
connection.

Port This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. Enter
the port number of the proxy server that the sensor uses for connection.

User Name This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. If the
proxy server requires authentication, enter a username.

Password This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. If the
proxy server requires authentication, enter the password for the user you
specified above.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

2592
Setting Description

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result to the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file names are
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt, Result of Sensor [ID] (Certificate 0 in
Certificate Chain).cer, Result of Sensor [ID] (Certificate 1 in Certificate
Chain).cer, Result of Sensor [ID] (Certificate 2 in Certificate Chain).cer,
Result of Sensor [ID] (Certificate Chain).txt, and Result of Sensor [ID]
(Certificate).cer. This setting is for debugging purposes. PRTG
overwrites these files with each scanning interval.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

You can use the debug option to get a logfile with information about the certificate chain.
Additionally, certificates in the certificate chain are stored in the log folder (.cer files). This can help
you, for example, if you have issues with the Root Authority Trusted channel of this sensor.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2593
Setting Description

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

2594
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Using Wildcards
You can use wildcards in the IP Address/DNS Name in the device settings 535 . Wildcards that apply to
only one level of the domain name are supported.

Example Result

*.wildcard.com for www.wildcard.com Works

api.wildcard.com for api.wildcard.com Works

contoso.com for contoso.com Works

*.subapi.subapi2.wildcard.com for Works

de.subapi.subapi2.wildcard.com

. .wildcard.com for www.de.wildcard.com Not supported

*.wildcard.com for de.subapi.wildcard.com Doesn't work

www.contoso.com for contoso.com Doesn't work

subapi.*.wildcard.com for Doesn't work

subapi.dns.wildcard.com

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2595
Channel Description

Common Name Check If the common name or subject-alternative names match the host address
or Server Name Indication (SNI) (if certificate name validation is enabled)
§ Up status: CN/SAN Match, Disabled, Matches Device Address,
Matches SNI
§ Down status: CN/SAN Do Not Match SNI, Does Not Match Device
Address, Does Not Match SNI

Days to Expiration The days to expiration with a predefined lower warning limit (28 days) and
lower error limit (7 days)
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Public Key Length The public key length

§ Up status 186 :
ú RSA keys: For 2048-bit keys (good security) and longer (perfect
security)
ú Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) keys: For 128-bit and 192-bit keys
(good security) and longer (perfect security)
§ Warning status: For weak security

§ Down status: For shorter keys (unsecure)

§ Unknown status: Unknown

Revoked If the certificate has been revoked

§ Up status: No

§ Warning status: Unable To Check Revocation Status

§ Down status: Yes

Root Authority Trusted If the certificate is trusted as root authority

§ Up status: Yes

§ Warning status: No

Self-Signed If a self-signed certificate is used

§ Up status: Yes, No

2596
More
Knowledge Base

How can I configure the WinHTTP proxy settings for the SSL Certificate sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/86280

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2597
7.8.237 SSL Security Check Sensor
The SSL Security Check sensor monitors Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS)
connectivity to the port of a device. It tries to connect to the specified TCP/IP port number of a device
with different SSL/TLS versions and shows if the device supports a particular protocol.

SSL Security Check Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2603 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: SSL Security Check

§ French: SSL vérification de sécurité

§ German: SSL-Sicherheitsüberprüfung

§ Japanese: SSL

§ Portuguese: Verificação de segurança SSL

§ Russian: П ро верка безо п асн о сти SSL

§ Simplified Chinese: SSL

§ Spanish: Comprobación de seguridad SSL

Remarks
§ This sensor only checks accepted protocols, it does not consider the used ciphers.

2598
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

2599
Setting Description

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

§ sslsensor

SSL Security Specific

Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port to which this sensor connects. Enter an
integer. The default port is 443.

Virtual Host (SNI Enter the host name that the sensor queries. The sensor uses this host
Domain) for the connection if the target server has multiple certificates on the same
IP address and IP port when using Server Name Indication (SNI).

2600
Connection Specific

Connection Specific

Setting Description

Server This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. Enter
the IP address or host name of the proxy server that the sensor uses for
connection.

Port This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. Enter
the port number of the proxy server that the sensor uses for connection.

User Name This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. If the
proxy server requires authentication, enter a username.

Password This setting is only visible if you select Use SOCKS proxy above. If the
proxy server requires authentication, enter the password for the user you
specified above.

Sensor Display

2601
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2602
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Security Rating The security of the connection to the defined port

§ Up status 186 : Only Strong Protocols Available
§ Warning status: Weak Protocols Available

§ Down status: No Secure Protocol Available

This channel is the primary channel by default.

SSL 2.0 (Deprecated) No longer available

2603
Channel Description

SSL 3.0 (Weak) The status of connections using SSL v3

§ Up status: Denied

§ Warning status: Accepted

TLS 1.0 (Weak) The status of connections using TLS 1.0

§ Up status: Denied

§ Warning status: Accepted

TLS 1.1 (Weak) The status of connections using TLS 1.1

§ Up status: Accepted

§ Unknown status: Denied

TLS 1.2 (Strong) The status of connections using TLS 1.2

§ Up status: Accepted

§ Unknown status: Denied

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

How do you determine the protocol security ratings of the SSL Security Check sensor?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/71566

2604
7.8.238 Syslog Receiver Sensor
The Syslog Receiver sensor receives and analyzes Syslog messages.

Syslog Receiver Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2614 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Syslog ontvanger

§ French: Récepteur Syslog

§ German: Syslog-Empfänger

§ Japanese: Syslog

§ Portuguese: Receptor de Syslog

§ Russian: П рием н ик Syslog

§ Simplified Chinese:

§ Spanish: Receptor de Syslog

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor only supports the User Datagram Protocol (UDP).

2605
§ If you do not add the sensor to a probe device but to a different device in PRTG, be careful with the
configuration: Ensure that the IP address or Domain Name System (DNS) name of the parent device
matches the proper sender. For example, if you want to receive messages from a storage area
network (SAN), you might need to add a device to PRTG using the IP address of a specific array
member that sends the messages. Providing a DNS name that points to the IP address of a whole
group might not work for SANs.
§ With the available filter options, you can individually define which types of messages the sensor
considers for monitoring, and which messages it categorizes as warning or error messages.
Depending on the filters, received messages are counted in the respective channels.

§ Add this sensor to the probe device to receive all messages of the remote probe system.

§ Add this sensor to a specific device to directly receive all messages from this device. This makes this
sensor faster than when you use source filters.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ You cannot use this sensor in cluster mode. You can only set it up on a local probe or a remote probe
but not on a cluster probe.
§ For a general introduction to the receiver's configuration, see section Monitoring Syslogs and SNMP
Traps 3390 .
§ You can use specific placeholders in email notification templates 3182 to see the messages when you

receive an email notification. See section List of Placeholders for Notifications 3704 .
§ The sensor states 186 of this sensor persist for one scanning interval only. After showing a Warning

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2606
Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ syslogsensor

Syslog Specific

Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port on which the sensor listens for Syslog
messages. The default port is 514. Enter an integer.

2607
Setting Description

We recommend that you use the default value.

Purge Messages After Define how long PRTG stores received Syslog messages for analysis.
Select a period of time from the dropdown list.

Filter
For detailed information, see section Filter Rules 2612 .

Filter

2608
Setting Description

Include Filter Define if you want to filter Syslog messages. If you leave this field empty
or use the keyword any, the sensor processes all data. To only include
specific types of messages, define filters using a special syntax.

Exclude Filter Define which types of Syslog messages the sensor discards and does not
process. To exclude specific types of messages, define filters using a
special syntax.

Warning Filter Define which types of Syslog messages count for the Warnings channel.
To categorize received messages as warning messages, define filters
using a special syntax.
The sensor collects messages until a scanning interval ends. As long
as the scanning interval is running, the sensor does not change its
status. By default, the sensor changes to the Warning status 186 after a
scanning interval finishes and there was at least one warning message
(and no error message) during this scanning interval. The sensor shows
the Warning at least until the succeeding scanning interval finishes. If the
sensor does not receive any warning or error message in this scanning
interval, its status changes to the Up status again with the start of the
next scanning interval.

Error Filter Define which types of Syslog messages count for the Errors channel. To
categorize received messages as error messages, define filters using a
special syntax.
The sensor collects messages until a scanning interval ends. As long
as the scanning interval is running, the sensor does not change its
status. By default, the sensor changes to the Down status after a
scanning interval finishes and there was at least one error message during
this scanning interval. The sensor shows the Down status at least until the
succeeding scanning interval finishes. If the sensor does not receive any
warning or error message in this scanning interval, its status changes to
the Up status again with the start of the next scanning interval.

Sensor Display

2609
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2610
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2611
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result (recommended): Do not store the sensor result.

Filter Rules
Filter rules are used for the include, exclude, warning, and error definition fields of the Syslog Receiver
sensor. They are based on the following format:
field[filter]

You can use various filters suitable to your needs. Include and exclude filters define which messages to
monitor. Warning and error filters define how to categorize received messages. Provide these filters in the
sensor settings as formulas. Formulas are fields that you can combine with boolean operators (AND,
OR, NOT) and brackets.

Field Parameter Example

source[ip] Enter an IP address where the messages come from. § source[10.0.23.50]

IP masks and ranges are also possible.
§ source[10.0.23.10-50]

§ source[10.0.23.10/24]

facility[number] Enter any number or range from 0 to 23 specifying the § facility[2]

program type that sends the message.
§ facility[5-7]

§ facility[5] OR facility[6]

severity[number] Enter any number or range from 0 (emergency) to 7 § severity[4]

(debug) specifying the message type.
§ severity[1-3]

§ severity[1] AND severity[2]

2612
Field Parameter Example

hostname[text] Enter any string that specifies the hostname of a device§ hostname[www.example.c
in the message. om]

tag[text] Enter any string that specifies the tag of a program or § tag[su]
process in the message.
appname[text] Enter any string that specifies the appname part of the § appname[myproc]
message.
§ appname[demo] AND
msgid[m42]

procid[text] Enter any string that specifies the process identifier § procid[1860]
part of the message.
msgid[text] Enter any string that specifies the message identifier § msgid[ID47]
part of the message.
message[parttext] Enter any string that specifies the message part of the § message[Error]
message. (Any substring matches. This value is case
insensitive.)
data This checks the SD-ID block of the message's § data[exampleSDID@12345
[id,param,value] structured data for a parameter matching the specified ,eventSource,Application]
value.
data[parttext] This checks if the specified substring matches § data[exampleSDID@1234]
structured data as displayed in the corresponding table.
data[id,param] This checks if the parameter exists in the specified ID § data[exampleSDID@1234,
element. eventSource]

String parameters (except the substring in message) must exactly match the particular parts of the
message. They are case sensitive.

Messages Tab: Review and Analyze Syslog Messages

PRTG stores received Syslog messages as common files in the \Syslog Database subfolder of the
PRTG data directory. To review and analyze all received messages, you can directly access the most
recent data in a table list 222 on the PRTG web interface. You can access this list via the sensor's
Overview tab.

Received Syslog messages are only shown in the table on the Overview tab after an (automatic)
page refresh following a sensor scan. The default value for auto refresh 3172 is 30 seconds.

For more details and further filter options, click the Messages tab of the Syslog Receiver sensor. You
see all received messages in a table list. On the top, you have display filter options to drill down into the
data for specific events of your interest. The filters are the same as those available in the sensor
settings, but you can define them without using formulas. Provide the desired parameters and PRTG
automatically loads the filtered list.

You can automatically add a filter by clicking the content of a column.

2613
Advanced Filter Settings

You can open advanced filter settings by clicking in the Filter row. The Advanced Filter appears in a
popup window. In the text field, you can define a filter using the syntax as specified in section Filter
Rules 2612 .

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Drops The number of dropped packets per second on the syslog port

Errors The number of messages categorized as "error" per second

Messages The number of received Syslog messages per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Warnings The number of messages categorized as "warning" per second

More
Knowledge Base

How can I configure sensors using speed limits to keep the status for more than one interval?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/73212

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

VIDEO TUTORIAL

SNMP Trap receiver and syslog receiver sensors

§ https://www.paessler.com/support/videos-and-webinars/videos/syslog-receiver

2614
7.8.239 System Health Sensor
The System Health sensor monitors the status of the probe system. It checks various system
parameters that can affect the quality of the monitoring results.

PRTG automatically creates this sensor. You cannot delete the sensor if it was created
automatically. If you manually create the sensor, you can delete it.

System Health Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2619 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: System Status

§ French: État du système

§ German: Systemzustand

§ Japanese:

§ Portuguese: Funcionamento do sistema

§ Russian: Рабо то сп о со бн о сть систем ы

§ Simplified Chinese:

§ Spanish: Salud de sistema

2615
Remarks
§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ systemhealthsensor

2616
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2617
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2618
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available Memory The amount of free memory available on the system. This value should not
fall below 500 MB. This way, PRTG can still request resources during
report generation or auto-discoveries, for example.

Available Memory % The available memory in percent

CPU Load The CPU load in percent on the probe system with a predefined upper
warning limit (50 %) and upper error limit (90 %). Extensive CPU load can
lead to false, incomplete, and incorrect monitoring results. This value
should usually stay below 50%.

Health The sum of the system status as a value between 100% (healthy) and 0%
(failing). Investigate frequent or repeated health values below 100%.
This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2619
7.8.240 TFTP Sensor
The TFTP sensor monitors a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server and checks if a certain file is
available for download.

TFTP Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2625 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: TFTP

§ French: TFTP

§ German: TFTP

§ Japanese: TFTP

§ Portuguese: TFTP

§ Russian: TFTP

§ Simplified Chinese: TFTP

§ Spanish: TFTP

Remarks
§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

2620
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ trivialftpsensor

2621
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Specific

Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port that the TFTP service runs on. The sensor
connects to this port. Enter an integer.

File Name Enter the name of the file that this sensor checks. If the file is not
available on the server, the sensor shows the Down status 186 . Enter a
string.

Sensor Display

2622
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2623
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2624
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Available The response time in msec

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2625
7.8.241 Traceroute Hop Count Sensor
The Traceroute Hop Count sensor traces the number of hops from the probe system to the IP
Address/DNS Name of the parent device.

If the number of hops (the route) changes, you can additionally define a different sensor status 186 .

Traceroute Hop Count Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2631 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Traceroute Hop Count

§ French: Compteur de Hop Traceroute

§ German: Traceroute Hop-Anzahl

§ Japanese: Traceroute

§ Portuguese: Contagem de hops em traceroute

§ Russian: Ко л-во п ерехо до в трассиро вки м арш рута

§ Simplified Chinese:

§ Spanish: Recuento de saltos traceroute

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system. If the sensor shows the error
PE087, additionally install .NET 3.5 on the probe system.

2626
§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2627
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ ptfsensor

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

If Route Changes Define what to do if the route has changed since the last check:
§ Ignore: Do not perform any action.

§ Set sensor to warning status: Show the Warning status 186 if the route
changes.
§ Set sensor to down status: Show the Down status if the route changes.

2628
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2629
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2630
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Execution Time The execution time in milliseconds (msec)

Hops The number of hops

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

2631
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2632
7.8.242 Veeam Backup Job Status Sensor
The Veeam Backup Job Status sensor monitors the status of all backup job runs on the Veeam Backup
Enterprise Manager in the last 24 hours.

Veeam Backup Job Status Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2638 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ French: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ German: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ Japanese: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ Portuguese: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ Russian: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ Simplified Chinese: Veeam Backup Job Status

§ Spanish: Veeam Backup Job Status

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Veeam 569 in settings that are higher in the object hierarchy 140 , for
example, in the settings of the parent device.

2633
§ This sensor requires an installation of the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager 10 or 11 with the
Enterprise Plus license.

§ This sensor does not support the following backup job types: Tape, Sure Backup, NAS Backup Copy,
and Agent Backup Copy.
§ This sensor does not support Veeam Agent Backup Jobs if they are managed by a Veeam Agent.

§ This sensor only supports version 1.5 of the Representational State Transfer (REST) application
programming interface (API).
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2634
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ veeam

§ veeambackup

§ veeamenterprisemanager

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2635
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2636
Scanning Interval
The minimum scanning interval of this sensor is 1 minute.

The recommended scanning interval of this sensor is 5 minutes.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

2637
Channel Unit Configuration
Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Job Runs Failed The number of failed job runs (sessions)

The Job Runs Failed channel shows the total number of all failed job
runs.

Job Runs Finished The number of finished job runs

The Job Runs Finished channel shows the total number of all job runs
in a warning state, successful job runs, and failed job runs.

Job Runs Running The number of running job runs

Job Runs Successful The number of successful job runs

2638
Channel Description

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Job Runs Warning The number of job runs in a warning state

Jobs Scheduled The number of scheduled backup jobs

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2639
7.8.243 Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced Sensor
The Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced sensor monitors the status of a specific backup job that runs
on the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager.

Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2646 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ French: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ German: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ Japanese: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ Portuguese: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ Russian: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ Simplified Chinese: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

§ Spanish: Veeam Backup Job Status Advanced

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Veeam 569 in settings that are higher in the object hierarchy 140 , for
example, in the settings of the parent device.

2640
§ This sensor requires an installation of the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager 10 or 11 with the
Enterprise Plus license.

§ This sensor only supports version 1.5 of the Representational State Transfer (REST) application
programming interface (API).
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

Veeam Specific

Setting Description

Backup Jobs You see a list of all backup jobs that are available on the Veeam Backup
Enterprise Manager. The backup jobs are listed by job name, job type,
platform, and job description.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2641
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ veeam

§ veeambackup

§ veeamenterprisemanager

2642
Veeam Specific

Veeam Specific

Setting Description

Job Name Shows the name of the backup job that this sensor monitors.

Job Type Shows the type of backup job that this sensor monitors.

Platform Shows the platform on which the backup job runs.

Job Description Shows the description of the backup job that this sensor monitors.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2643
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2644
Scanning Interval
The minimum scanning interval of this sensor is 1 minute.

The recommended scanning interval of this sensor is 5 minutes.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

2645
Channel Unit Configuration
Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Duration The duration of the backup job run in seconds

Job Scheduled If the backup job is scheduled

§ Up status: No, Yes. Which status the sensor actually shows depends
on the lookup file 3541 that you choose in the channel settings.
For more information, see the Knowledge Base: How can I change
the status of my Veeam sensors based on whether a job is
scheduled or not?
§ Down status: No

Last Job Run The time since the last backup job run

2646
Channel Description

Last Result The status of the last backup job run

§ Up status: Successful

§ Warning status: Warning

§ Down status: Failed

§ Unknown status: None

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Status The overall status of the backup job run

§ Up status: Starting, Working, Stopped

§ Warning status: Stopping, Pausing, Resuming, Never started,

Postprocessing
§ Unknown status: Idle

More
Knowledge Base

How can I change the status of my Veeam sensors based on whether a job is scheduled or not?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/89136

2647
7.8.244 VMware Datastore (SOAP) Sensor
The VMware Datastore (SOAP) sensor monitors the disk usage of a VMware datastore using the Simple
Object Access Protocol (SOAP).

VMw are Datastore (SOAP) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2654 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: VMware Datastore (SOAP)

§ French: VMware Datastore (SOAP)

§ German: VMware Datastore (SOAP)

§ Japanese: VMware Datastore SOAP

§ Portuguese: Armazenamento de dados VMware (SOAP)

§ Russian: Хран илищ е дан н ы х VMware (SOAP)

§ Simplified Chinese: VMware (SOAP)

§ Spanish: Almacén de datos VMware (SOAP)

Remarks
§ The parent device must be a VMware ESXi server version 5.2 or later or vCenter.

§ This sensor requires credentials for VMware/XenServer 547 in the settings of the parent device. Ensure

that you enter a user with sufficient access rights to obtain statistics (read-only usually works).

2648
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a very low performance impact.

§ This sensor has predefined limits for several metrics. You can individually change these limits in the
channel settings. For detailed information about channel limits, see section Channel Settings 3052 .
§ See the Knowledge Base: I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is
correct. What can I do?
§ See the Knowledge Base: Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?

This sensor supersedes the outdated SSH VMWare ESX(i) Disk sensor. We recommend that you
use this new VMware Datastore (SOAP) sensor to monitor VMware datastores.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Settings on VMware Host System

If you set up this sensor on different probes (for example, when using remote probes 3557 or when running
a failover cluster 137 ), you might need to change the settings of your VMware host so that it accepts
more incoming connections. Otherwise, you might get connection timeouts when running plenty of
VMware sensors with a short scanning interval.

For details about this setting, see the Knowledge Base: How can I increase the connection limit on
VMware systems? PE121.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

2649
Datastore Settings

Setting Description

Datastores Select the datastores that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor
for each datastore that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2650
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ vmwaredatastoreexternsensor

Datastore Settings

Setting Description

Managed Object Identifier Shows the managed object identifier (MOID) of the datastore that this
(MOID) sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2651
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2652
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2653
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Accessible The accessibility of the datastore

§ Up status: Yes

§ Down status: No

Available Capacity The available capacity in bytes (the physically or virtually available size of
the datastore)

Free Bytes The free space in bytes (the disk space that is not used by virtual
machines (VM). Used disk space can be either thick-provisioned or used
by thin-provisioned virtual disks)

Free Space The free space in percent (the disk space that is not used by VMs. Used
disk space can be either thick-provisioned or used by thin-provisioned
virtual disks)
This channel is the primary channel by default.

2654
Channel Description

Total Provisioned The total provisioned disk space in percent (the sum of all potentially used
disk space of thin-provisioned and thick-provisioned VM hard drives, that
is, the uncommitted bytes plus used bytes)

Uncommitted Bytes The uncommitted bytes (the disk space that is provisioned for thin-
provisioned VMs but not used yet)

More
Knowledge Base

I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is correct. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/66794

Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/78274

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

How can I increase the connection limit on VMware systems? PE121

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/30643

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Monitoring VMware ESXi 5.5 does not work. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59173

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

2655
7.8.245 VMware Host Hardware (WBEM) Sensor
The VMware Host Hardware (WBEM) sensor monitors information about the hardware of an ESXi server
using Web-based Enterprise Management (WBEM).

VMw are Host Hardw are (WBEM) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2661 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: VMware Host Hardware (WBEM)

§ French: VMware matériel du serveur hôte (WBEM)

§ German: VMware Host Hardware (WBEM)

§ Japanese: VMware WBEM

§ Portuguese: Hardware de host VMware (WBEM)

§ Russian: Ап п аратн ы е средства узла VMware (WBEM)

§ Simplified Chinese: VMware (WBEM)

§ Spanish: Hardware de host VMware (WBEM)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires that the CIM interface is enabled on the ESXi host. On ESXi 6.5 and later, you
2657

must manually enable CIM.

§ This sensor requires credentials for Linux/Solaris/macOS (SSH/WBEM) systems 543 in the settings of
the parent device.

2656
§ The parent device must be a VMware ESXi server version 5.2 or later.

§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor only supports the IPv4 protocol.

Detailed Requirements

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

2659
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2660
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2661
Channel Description

Current The current in milliampere (mA)

Healthstate The health status

§ Up status 186 : OK Unknown
§ Warning status: Degraded, Minor

§ Down status: Critical, Major, Non Recoverable Error

Power The average host power usage in watts

Rotational Speed The fan revolutions per minute (RPM)

Temperature The temperature

More
Knowledge Base

Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/78274

How do I enable the CIM interface on VMware ESXi 6.5?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/76255

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2662
7.8.246 VMware Host Hardware Status (SOAP) Sensor
The VMware Host Hardware Status (SOAP) sensor monitors the hardware status of a VMware host
server using the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP). It gives you a general status overview of the
host.

The sensor also shows any states other than normal in the sensor message.

VMw are Host Hardw are Status (SOAP) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2669 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: VMware Host Hardware Status (SOAP)

§ French: VMware statut du matériel du serveur hôte (SOAP)

§ German: VMware Hostserver Hardware-Zustand (SOAP)

§ Japanese: VMware SOAP

§ Portuguese: Status do hardware de host VMware (SOAP)

§ Russian: Со сто ян ие ап п аратн ы х средств узла VMware (SOAP)

§ Simplified Chinese: VMware (SOAP)

§ Spanish: Estado de hardware host VMware (SOAP)

Remarks
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

2663
§ This sensor requires credentials for VMware/XenServer 547 in the settings of the parent device. Ensure

that you enter a user with sufficient access rights to obtain statistics (read-only usually works).

§ The parent device must be a VMware ESXi server version 5.2 or later. We recommend that you do not
use this sensor on your vCenter. Reliable hardware information can only be provided when this sensor
is created on your physical host server as parent device.
§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ This sensor only shows items that report an actual status, so you might see more "sensors" in your
vSphere client than the number of states available in the channels of this sensor
§ See the Knowledge Base: I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is
correct. What can I do?
§ See the Knowledge Base: Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Settings on VMware Host System

For details about this setting, see the Knowledge Base: How can I increase the connection limit on
VMware systems? PE121.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

VMware Host Settings

2664
Setting Description

Host Servers Select the host servers that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each host server that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2665
Setting Description

§ esxserverhosthealthsensor

VMware Host Settings

VMw are Host Settings

Setting Description

Managed Object Identifier Shows the managed object identifier of the host that this sensor monitors.
(MOID)
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Known Warnings Enter one or more warning messages from the VMware host that you want
to ignore. Use semicolons (;) as separators, for example, Power Supply
7;Power Supply 8. Enter a string or leave the field empty.
Warning messages that you enter do not affect the sensor status 186 .
We strongly recommend that you use this filter for known issues
only. For example, for states that systems return because of
errors in the vendors' CIM extensions. Because of this, the sensor might
never show the Up status although the vSphere client does not show any
warnings.

2666
Setting Description

Known Errors Enter one or more error messages from the VMware host that you want to
ignore. Use semicolons (;) as separators, for example, Power Supply
7;Power Supply 8. Enter a string or leave the field empty.
Error messages that you enter do not affect the sensor status.
We strongly recommend that you use this filter for known issues
only. For example, for states that systems return because of
errors in the vendors' CIM extensions. Because of this, the sensor might
never show the Up status although the vSphere client does not show any
errors.

Handling of Unknown Define the sensor behavior when the vSphere client reports unknown
States states:
§ Show unknown states (default): Show unknown states in the status
message and set the sensor to the Warning status.
§ Do not show unknown states: Do not show unknown states in the
status message and do not change the sensor status.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2667
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2668
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Alert States The total number of items in the alert status as the vSphere client reports

Normal States The total number of items in the normal status as the vSphere client
reports
This channel is the primary channel by default.

Unknown States The total number of items in the unknown status as the vSphere client
reports

2669
Channel Description

Warning States The total number of items in the warning status as the vSphere client
reports

More
Knowledge Base

I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is correct. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/66794

Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/78274

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

How can I increase the connection limit on VMware systems? PE121

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/30643

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Monitoring VMware ESXi 5.5 does not work. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59173

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

For more information about sensor settings, see the following sections:

§ List of Available Sensor Types 3626

§ Additional Sensor Types (Custom Sensors) 3047

§ Channel Settings 3052

§ Notification Triggers Settings 3063

2670
7.8.247 VMware Host Performance (SOAP) Sensor
The VMware Host Performance (SOAP) sensor monitors a VMware host server using the Simple Object
Access Protocol (SOAP).

VMw are Host Performance (SOAP) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2677 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: VMware Host Prestaties (SOAP)

§ French: VMware performances du serveur hôte (SOAP)

§ German: VMware Hostserver Leistung (SOAP)

§ Japanese: VMware SOAP

§ Portuguese: Performance do host VMware (SOAP)

§ Russian: Рабо та узла VMware (SOAP)

§ Simplified Chinese: VMware (SOAP)

§ Spanish: Rendimiento de host VMware (SOAP)

2671
Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires credentials for VMware/XenServer 547 in the settings of the parent device. Ensure

that you enter a user with sufficient access rights to obtain statistics (read-only usually works).
§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is
correct. What can I do?
§ See the Knowledge Base: Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Settings on VMware Host System

For details about this setting, see the Knowledge Base: How can I increase the connection limit on
VMware systems? PE121.

2672
Basic Sensor Settings
Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ esxserverhostsensor

2673
VMware Host Settings

VMw are Host Settings

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2674
Setting Description

are available for this sensor.

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a
channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:

§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2675
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2676
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Ready (Percent) The CPU readiness in percent

CPU Usage The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Datastore Total The datastore total read latency in milliseconds (msec)

ReadLatency

Datastore Total The datastore total write latency in msec

WriteLatency

Disk Read The disk read speed in bytes per second

Disk Usage The disk usage per second

Disk Write The disk write speed in bytes per second

Disk.DeviceLatency The disk device latency in msec

Disk.KernelLatency The disk kernel latency in msec

Memory Active The active memory in bytes

Memory Consumed The consumed memory in bytes

Memory Consumed The memory consumed in percent

(Percent)

Memory Swap Used The used memory swap

Network Received The received bytes per second

Network Transmitted The transmitted bytes per second

2677
Channel Description

Network Usage The total network usage in bytes per second

Power The average host power usage in watts

More
Knowledge Base

I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is correct. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/66794

Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/78274

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

How can I increase the connection limit on VMware systems? PE121

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/30643

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Monitoring VMware ESXi 5.5 does not work. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59173

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

2678
7.8.248 VMware Virtual Machine (SOAP) Sensor
The VMware Virtual Machine (SOAP) sensor monitors a virtual machine (VM) on a VMware host server
using the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP).

VMw are Virtual Machine (SOAP) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2685 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: VMware Virtuele Machine (SOAP)

§ French: VMware machine virtuelle (SOAP)

§ German: VMware Virtual Machine (SOAP)

§ Japanese: VMware SOAP

§ Portuguese: Máquina virtual VMware (SOAP)

§ Russian: Виртуальн ая м аш ин а VMware (SOAP)

§ Simplified Chinese: VMware (SOAP)

§ Spanish: Máquina virtual VMware (SOAP)

2679
Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires credentials for VMware/XenServer 547 in the settings of the parent device. Ensure
that you enter a user with sufficient access rights to obtain statistics (read-only usually works).
§ We recommend that you use vCenter as parent device. If the monitored VM changes the host server
via vMotion, PRTG can still continue monitoring. The sensor can monitor VMware ESXi server version
5.2 or later.
§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ For VMware virtual machines, disk usage channels are only available as of virtual hardware version 8.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Settings on VMware Host System

For details about this setting, see the Knowledge Base: How can I increase the connection limit on
VMware systems? PE121.

2680
PRTG requests a full list of all VMs configured on the target device. Because of this, it might take a
few seconds before the dialog appears.

VMware Virtual Machine Settings

Setting Description

Virtual Machines You see a list of all VMs available on the host server on this device,
including the ones that do not run. PRTG lists all VMs by name and the
operating system that they run on. Select the VMs that you want to
monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for each VM that you select.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

2681
Setting Description

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ esxservervmsensor

VMware Virtual Machine Settings

VMw are Virtual Machine Settings

Setting Description

Managed Object Identifier Shows the managed object identifier (MOID) of the VM that this sensor
(MOID) monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Powered-Off VM Handling Define how the sensor reacts to VMs that are powered off:
§ Alarm when VM is powered off (default): Change to the Down status 186

if the VM is powered off.

If the sensor is in the Down status, it does not record any data in any
of its channels.
§ Ignore powered-off state: Do not change to the Down status if the VM is
powered off. The sensor reports zero values instead.

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

2682
Setting Description

This option is not available when the sensor runs on the hosted probe
of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2683
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2684
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Ready (Percent) The CPU readiness in percent

CPU Usage The CPU usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Datastore Total Read The datastore total read latency in milliseconds (msec)
Latency

Datastore Total Write The datastore total write latency in msec

Latency

Disk Read The disk read speed in bytes per second

2685
Channel Description

Disk Usage The disk usage per second

Disk Write The disk write speed in bytes per second

Memory Active The active memory in bytes

Memory Consumed The consumed memory in bytes

Memory Consumed The memory consumed in percent

(Percent)

Network Received The received bytes per second

Network Transmitted The transmitted bytes per second

Network Usage The total network usage in bytes per second

Power The average host power usage in watts

More
Knowledge Base

I cannot add VMware sensors because of "wrong" password although it is correct. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/66794

Why are my VMware sensors not working after upgrading to VCSA 6.5 U1?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/78274

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

How can I increase the connection limit on VMware systems? PE121

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/30643

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

Monitoring VMware ESXi 5.5 does not work. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59173

For which sensor types do you recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 or later and why?

2686
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/64331

2687
7.8.249 Windows CPU Load Sensor
The Windows CPU Load sensor monitors the CPU load on a computer via Windows Management
Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the Windows Compatibility
Options 569 of the parent device.

Window s CPU Load Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2694 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Processor Belasting

§ French: Windows charge CPU

§ German: Windows Prozessorlast

§ Japanese: Windows CPU

§ Portuguese: Carga de CPU Windows

§ Russian: Загрузка ЦП Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows CPU

§ Spanish: Carga de CPU Windows

2688
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Windows credentials This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings
of the parent device. Preferably, use Windows domain credentials.
If you use local credentials, make sure that the same Windows user
accounts (with the same user name and password) exist on both the
probe system and the target computer. Otherwise, a connection via
performance counters is not possible. However, WMI connections might
still work.

Windows version For this sensor to work with Windows performance counters, make sure
that Windows Server 2008 R2 or later is installed on the probe system (on
every cluster node, if on a cluster probe).
WoW64 must be installed on target systems that run Windows
Server 2016. This allows 32-bit applications to be run on 64-bit
systems. This is necessary because the PRTG probe service only runs
with 32-bit support. Without it, WMI sensors do not work.

Remote Registry For this sensor to work with Windows performance counters, make sure
Windows service that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer. If
this service does not run, a connection via performance counters is not
possible. However, WMI connections might still work.

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

By default, this sensor uses WMI to request monitoring data. You can change the default behavior
to a hybrid approach in the Windows Compatibility Options of the parent device's settings 569 on
which you create this sensor: if you choose this option, the sensor first tries to query data via Windows
performance counters and uses WMI as a fallback if performance counters are not available. When
running in fallback mode, the sensor tries to connect via performance counters again after 24 hours.

2689
Sensors that use the WMI protocol have a high impact on the system performance. Try to stay
below 200 WMI sensors per probe 133 . Above this number, consider using multiple remote
probes 3557 for load balancing.

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2690
Setting Description

§ cpuloadsensor

§ wmicpuloadsensor

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt. This setting is for debugging purposes.
PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning interval.
In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Alternative WMI Query

2691
Setting Description

Query Method Select the method that the sensor uses to query via WMI:
§ Use the default WMI query method: Use the standard method to query
WMI. We recommend that you use this option.
§ Use the alternative WMI query method: Use an alternative method to
query WMI for better compatibility if WMI sensors return errors such as
class not valid or invalid data.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2692
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2693
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Processor [#] The CPU load of the processor in percent

Total The total CPU load in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

2694
What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2695
7.8.250 Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Received Sensor
The Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Received sensor monitors the number of received emails for a Microsoft
Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) service (Exchange 2003) via
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the
Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2703 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Ontvangen

§ French: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP reçu

§ German: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Empfangen

§ Japanese: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Portuguese: Recebido Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Russian: П о лучен о п акето в Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Spanish: Recibidos Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This service is not used by Exchange Server 2007 and higher. Exchange Server 2007 uses its own
SMTP stack implemented in the Microsoft Exchange Transport service.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

2696
Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

Sensors that use the WMI protocol have a high impact on the system performance. Try to stay
below 200 WMI sensors per probe 133 . Above this number, consider using multiple remote
probes 3557 for load balancing.

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

2697
Basic Sensor Settings
Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiiissmtpreceivedsensor

2698
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2699
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2700
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

Setting Description

Schedule Select a schedule from the list. You can use schedules to monitor during
a certain time span (days or hours) every week. Choose from:
§ None

§ Saturdays

§ Sundays

§ Weekdays

§ Weekdays Eight-To-Eight (08:00 - 20:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (17:00 - 09:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (20:00 - 08:00)

§ Weekdays Nine-To-Five (09:00 - 17:00)

§ Weekends

You can create schedules, edit schedules, or pause monitoring for a

specific time span. For more information, see section Schedules 3215 .

Maintenance Begins This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the start date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

2701
Setting Description

Maintenance Ends This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the end date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

§ Select a sensor: Use the dependency type of the parent object.

Dependency This setting is only visible if you enable Select a sensor above. Click
and use the object selector 225 to select a sensor on which the current
object will depend.

2702
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

2703
Channel Description

Message Bytes Received The number of bytes in received messages

Messages Received The number of received messages

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2704
7.8.251 Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Sent Sensor
The Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Sent sensor monitors the number of sent emails for a Microsoft Internet
Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) service (Exchange 2003) via
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the
Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2712 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Verzonden

§ French: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP envoyé

§ German: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP Versendet

§ Japanese: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Portuguese: Enviado Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Russian: О тп равлен о п акето в Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

§ Spanish: Enviados Windows IIS 6.0 SMTP

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

§ This service is not used by Exchange Server 2007 and higher. Exchange Server 2007 uses its own
SMTP stack implemented in the Microsoft Exchange Transport service.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

2705
Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

2706
Basic Sensor Settings
Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiiissmtpsentsensor

2707
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2708
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2709
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

Setting Description

Schedule Select a schedule from the list. You can use schedules to monitor during
a certain time span (days or hours) every week. Choose from:
§ None

§ Saturdays

§ Sundays

§ Weekdays

§ Weekdays Eight-To-Eight (08:00 - 20:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (17:00 - 09:00)

§ Weekdays Nights (20:00 - 08:00)

§ Weekdays Nine-To-Five (09:00 - 17:00)

§ Weekends

You can create schedules, edit schedules, or pause monitoring for a

specific time span. For more information, see section Schedules 3215 .

Maintenance Begins This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the start date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

2710
Setting Description

Maintenance Ends This setting is only visible if you enable Set up a one-time maintenance
window above. Use the date time picker to enter the end date and time of
the one-time maintenance window.

§ Select a sensor: Use the dependency type of the parent object.

Dependency This setting is only visible if you enable Select a sensor above. Click
and use the object selector 225 to select a sensor on which the current
object will depend.

2711
Access Rights

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

2712
Channel Description

Message Bytes Sent The number of bytes in sent messages

Message Send Retries The number of retries per second for sent messages

Messages Sent The number of sent messages

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2713
7.8.252 Windows IIS Application Sensor
The Windows IIS Application sensor monitors a Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) server via
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI). It can also monitor applications that use IIS, such as
Microsoft SharePoint or Microsoft Reporting Services (SSRS).

Window s IIS Application Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2720 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows IIS Toepassing

§ French: Windows IIS application

§ German: Windows IIS-Anwendung

§ Japanese: Windows IIS

§ Portuguese: Aplicativo Windows IIS

§ Russian: П рило жен ие Windows IIS

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows IIS

2714
§ Spanish: Aplicación IIS Windows

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a medium performance impact.

§ The sensor cannot return data for the channels Status, Uptime, and Total when using performance
counters. We recommend that you use WMI only (recommended) as Preferred Data Source in the
Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Windows Internet Information Services

Setting Description

Instances Select the instances that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor
for each instance that you select.

Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the

items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2715
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiiis

2716
Windows Internet Information Services

Window s Internet Information Services

Setting Description

Instance Shows the unique instance name of the web service that this sensor
monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:

§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt. This setting is for debugging purposes.
PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning interval.
In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2717
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2718
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2719
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Anonymous Users The number of anonymous users per second

Bytes Received The number of bytes received per second

Bytes Sent The number of bytes sent per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

CGI Requests The number of Common Gateway Interface (CGI) requests per second

Files Received The number of files received per second

Files Sent The number of files sent per second

Get Requests The number of GET requests per second

Known Users The number of known users per second

Not Found Errors The number of not found errors per second

Post Requests The number of POST requests per second

Status The status of the web service

§ Up status 186 : Running
§ Down status: Stopped

Total The total in bytes per second

Uptime The uptime of the web service

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

2720
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2721
7.8.253 Windows MSMQ Queue Length Sensor
The Windows MSMQ Queue Length sensor reads the number of messages in a Microsoft message
queue of the parent device.

Window s MSMQ Queue Length Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2728 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows MSMQ wachtrijlengte

§ French: Windows MSMQ longueur de la file d'attente

§ German: Windows MSMQ Queue-Länge

§ Japanese: Windows MSMQ

§ Portuguese: Comprimento da fila MSMQ Windows

§ Russian: Длин а о череди Windows MSMQ

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows MSMQ

§ Spanish: Longitud de cola MSMQ Windows

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires that the Microsoft Message Queuing (MSMQ) service runs on both the probe
2723

system and the target system.

§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system. If the sensor shows the error
PE087, additionally install .NET 3.5 on the probe system.

2722
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.

§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ See the Knowledge Base: How do I activate Message Queuing in my Windows installation?

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

MSMQ service For this sensor to work, the MSMQ service must be started both on the
target system and on the probe system. Additionally, the MSMQ service
must also be started on the target computer.

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Depending on your Windows version, you might first need to install the
MSMQ Server.
When installing MSMQ Server, make sure that you install it including
the Directory Service. Depending on your Windows installation, this
might have a different name, such as:
§ MSMQ Active Directory Domain Service Integration

§ Directory Service Integration

§ Active Directory Integration

For details, see the Knowledge Base: How do I activate Message

Queuing in my Windows installation?

2723
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Message Queues Select the message queues that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each message queue that you select.
If no message queues are available, you see a corresponding
message.
This sensor cannot monitor subqueues.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items
or to cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the
upper-right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2724
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ ptfsensor

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Message Queue Shows the name of the message queue that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Message Queue Type Shows the type of the message queue that this sensor monitors.

2725
Setting Description

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Minimum Message Age Optionally define an age in minutes that the message must be for the
sensor to count it. If you set a minimum message age, the sensor does
not regard messages that are younger than this age. If you leave this field
empty, the sensor does not check for the message age. Enter an integer
or leave the field empty.

If Value Changes Define what the sensor does when the sensor value changes:
§ Ignore changes (default): Take no action on change.

§ Trigger 'change' notification: Send an internal message indicating that

the sensor value has changed. In combination with a change trigger 3182 ,
you can use this mechanism to trigger a notification 3063 whenever the
sensor value changes.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

2726
Sensor Display

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

2727
Scanning Interval

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

2728
Channel Description

Execution Time The execution time in milliseconds (msec)

Messages The total number of messages in the queue

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

How do I activate Message Queuing in my Windows installation?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/25963

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2729
7.8.254 Windows Network Card Sensor
The Windows Network Card sensor monitors the bandwidth usage and traffic of a network interface via
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the
Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

Window s Netw ork Card Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2737 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Netwerkkaart

§ French: Windows carte réseau

§ German: Windows Netzwerkadapter

§ Japanese: Windows

§ Portuguese: Adaptador de rede Windows

§ Russian: Сетево й адап тер Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows

2730
§ Spanish: Tarjeta de red Windows

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires 2731 Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system to work with Windows
performance counters.

§ This sensor requires that the Windows Remote Registry service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later or Windows 7 or later to monitor 64-bit counters
of the class Network Adapter (virtual network interfaces). On older target systems, the sensor can only
monitor 32-bit counters of the class Network Interface (the physical interface) and shows fewer
channels.
§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.
§ This sensor supports teamed network adapters ("network interface card (NIC) teaming") on Windows
Server 2012.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

2731
Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Sensor Specific

Setting Description

Network Cards Select the network cards that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each network card that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2732
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ bandwidthsensor

§ wmibandwidthsensor

Sensor Specific

2733
Setting Description

Network Card Shows the name of the network card that this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file name is
Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt. This setting is for debugging purposes.
PRTG overwrites this file with each scanning interval.
In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

2734
Setting Description

You can set a different primary channel later by clicking below a

channel gauge on the sensor's Overview tab.

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

2735
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window
You cannot interrupt the inheritance for schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. The
corresponding settings from the parent objects are always active. However, you can define additional
schedules, dependencies, and maintenance windows. They are active at the same time as the parent
objects' settings.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

2736
Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Discards In The number of incoming discards per second

Discards Out The number of outgoing discards per second

Errors In The number of incoming errors per second

Errors Out The number of outgoing errors per second

Non-Unicast In The number of incoming non-unicast packets per second

Non-Unicast Out The number of outgoing non-unicast packets per second

Packets The number of packets in total

Packets Received The number of packets received per second

2737
Channel Description

Packets Sent The number of packets sent per second

Total The total traffic in bytes per second

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Traffic In The incoming traffic in bytes per second

Traffic Out The outgoing traffic in bytes per second

Unicast In The number of incoming unicast packets per second

Unicast Out The number of outgoing unicast packets per second

Unknown Protocols In The number of unknown protocols per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2738
7.8.255 Windows Pagefile Sensor
The Windows Pagefile sensor monitors the Windows pagefile usage via Windows Management
Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the Windows Compatibility
Options 569 of the parent device.

Window s Pagefile Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2744 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Wisselbestand

§ French: Windows fichier d'échange

§ German: Windows Auslagerungsdatei

§ Japanese: Windows

§ Portuguese: Arquivo de Paginação (Pagefile) Windows

§ Russian: Файл п о дкачки Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows

§ Spanish: Archivo de página Windows

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

2739
§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.

§ This sensor does not work with Windows 2000 because the respective WMI class does not exist on
this operating system.
§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

2740
Sensors that use the WMI protocol have a high impact on the system performance. Try to stay
below 200 WMI sensors per probe 133 . Above this number, consider using multiple remote
probes 3557 for load balancing.

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:

2741
Setting Description

§ pagefilesensor

§ wmipagefilesensor

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2742
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2743
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Total The total pagefile usage in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?

2744
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2745
7.8.256 Windows Physical Disk I/O Sensor
The Windows Physical Disk I/O sensor monitors the input/output (I/O) parameters of a hard disk on a
Windows system via Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters,
as configured in the Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

Window s Physical Disk I/O Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2753 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Fysieke Schijf I/O

§ French: Windows disque physique E/S

§ German: Windows Physikalischer Datenträger E/A

§ Japanese: Windows I/O

§ Portuguese: E/S de disco físico Windows

§ Russian: Вво д-вы во д ф изическо го диска Windows

2746
§ Simplified Chinese: Windows I/O

§ Spanish: E/S de disco físico Windows

§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

2747
Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Windows Physical Disk Specific

Setting Description

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

2748
Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiphysicaldisksensor

Windows Physical Disk Specific

Window s Physical Disk Specific

2749
Setting Description

Disk Shows the physical disk that this sensor monitors.

PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

PRTG only stores the result of this sensor if you select WMI only
(recommended) as Preferred Data Source in the Windows
Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2750
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2751
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

2752
Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Avg Bytes Per Read The average number of bytes per read

Avg Bytes Per Transfer The average number of bytes per transfer

Avg Bytes Per Write The average number of bytes per write

Avg Queue The average number of items in the queue

Avg Read Queue The average number of items in the read queue

Avg Read Time The average read time in milliseconds (msec)

Avg Transfer Time The average transfer time in msec

Avg Write Queue The average number of items in the write queue

Avg Write Time The average write time in msec

Current Queue The current number of items in the queue

Disk IOs The number of disk input/output (I/O) operations per second

Disk Read The disk read speed in bytes per second

Disk Read IOs The number of disk read I/O operations per second

Disk Read Time % The disk read time in percent

This channel is the primary channel by default.

Disk Time % The disk time in percent

Disk Transfer The disk transfer speed in bytes per second

Disk Write The disk write speed in bytes per second

Disk Write IOs The number of disk write I/O operations per second

2753
Channel Description

Disk Write Time % The disk write time in percent

Idle Time % The idle time in percent

Split IOs The number of split I/O operations per second

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2754
7.8.257 Windows Print Queue Sensor
The Windows Print Queue sensor reads the print queue on the parent device and returns the number of
jobs in the print queue. It can monitor queues for all printers that are locally installed.

You can use this sensor to monitor all print queues on your Windows print server and to retrieve
information about all available jobs that are in the queue longer than defined.

Additionally, this sensor can change to a defined status if there is a printer problem. See section
Sensor Settings 2757 for available parameters.

Window s Print Queue Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2764 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Print Queue

§ French: Windows file d'attente d'impression

§ German: Windows Druckwarteschlange

§ Japanese: Windows

§ Portuguese: Fila de impressão Windows

§ Russian: О чередь п ечати Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows

§ Spanish: Cola de impresión Windows

2755
Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires 2756 that the Print Spooler Windows service runs on the target device and the
probe system.
§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system. If the sensor shows the error
PE087, additionally install .NET 3.5 on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ We recommend Windows Server 2012 R2 on the probe system for best performance of this sensor.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ You can add a change trigger 3182 to this sensor to get a notification when the number of jobs in the
queue changes.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Print Spooler Windows For this sensor to work, the Print Spooler Windows service must be
service started on the target computer and the probe system.

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

2756
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Print Queues Select the print queues that you want to monitor. PRTG creates one
sensor for each print queue that you select.
If no print queues are available, you see a corresponding message.
If a printer name changes after sensor creation, you need to add the
sensor anew.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

2757
Setting Description

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ ptfsensor

Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Print Queue Shows the name of the task whose print queue this sensor monitors.
PRTG shows this value for reference purposes only. If you need to
change this value, add the sensor anew.

2758
Setting Description

Advanced Status Options You can optionally define specific sensor states 186 for several return
messages of the printer that this sensor monitors. Choose between:
§ Do not define sensor states for specific return messages: Do not define
sensor states for specific return messages.
§ Define sensor states for specific return messages: Define sensor states
for various messages that the printer reports.
Not all printer types properly support Advanced Status Options, which
might lead to false alerts. If the printer does not support a property,
this property is always false. This means that the sensor cannot display
the state or detect if the printer supports the property. Even if the printer
can report a property, it can only do so if a print job is sent to the printer.

Door Open This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Manual Feed Required This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Needs User Intervention This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Offline This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

2759
Setting Description

Out of Memory This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Out of Paper This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Paper Jammed This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Paper Problem This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:

§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Paused This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Printer Error This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

2760
Setting Description

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Printer Not Available This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Toner Low This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Toner Out This setting is only available if you select the Define sensor states for
specific return messages above. For each problem that the printer reports,
you can define the status that the sensor shows. Choose between:
§ Ignore: Stay the same if the printer reports this message.

§ Warning: Show the Warning status if the printer reports this message.

§ Down: Show the Down status if the printer reports this message.

Minimum Print Job Age Optionally define the age of the print job in seconds. If you define a
(Sec.) minimum print job age, the sensor does not regard jobs that are younger
than this value. If you leave this field empty, the sensor does not check for
the print job age. Enter an integer or leave the field empty.

Debug Options

2761
Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2762
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2763
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Execution Time The execution time in milliseconds (msec)

Jobs The number of jobs in the queue

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

2764
7.8.258 Windows Process Sensor
The Windows Process sensor monitors a Windows process via Windows Management Instrumentation
(WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the Windows Compatibility Options 569 of the
parent device.

Window s Process Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2771 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Proces

§ French: Windows processus

§ German: Windows Prozess

§ Japanese: Windows

§ Portuguese: Processo Windows

§ Russian: П ро цесс Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows

§ Spanish: Proceso Windows

2765
Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no more
than 200 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ The sensor cannot show values above 4 GB for 64-bit processes if you use performance counters.

§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

2766
Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI
By default, this sensor uses WMI to request monitoring data. You can change the default behavior
to a hybrid approach in the Windows Compatibility Options of the parent device's settings 569 on
which you create this sensor: if you choose this option, the sensor first tries to query data via Windows
performance counters and uses WMI as a fallback if performance counters are not available. When
running in fallback mode, the sensor tries to connect via performance counters again after 24 hours.

For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

2767
Setting Description

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiprocesssensor

Windows Process Monitor

Window s Process Monitor

Setting Description

Executable Enter the name of the process that you want to monitor. Provide the name
of an executable file without the .exe extension (for example, enter firefox
to monitor firefox.exe).
The sensor shows the Down status 186 if the process is not active on
the target device.

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:

2768
Setting Description

§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

2769
Inherited Settings
By default, all of these settings are inherited from objects that are higher in the hierarchy. We
recommend that you change them centrally in the root group settings 396 if necessary. To change a
setting for this object only, click under the corresponding setting name to disable the inheritance
and to display its options.

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

2770
For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel Unit Configuration

Which channel units are available depends on the sensor type and the available parameters. If no
configurable channels are available, this field shows No configurable channels.

Channel Unit Configuration

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 422 , section Channel Unit Configuration.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

CPU Usage (Average Per The average CPU usage (if multiple instances are running) in percent
Instance)
For the CPU Usage (average per instance) value, the summed up
CPU usage value is divided by the number of all instances. It shows
the average CPU usage of a single instance of the process on one CPU.

CPU Usage (Total) The total CPU usage in percent

For the CPU Usage (Total) value of a process, all CPU usage values
are summed up. The total is divided by the number of all CPUs and
the maximum value is 100%. This corresponds to the CPU usage of all
instances of this specific process.

2771
Channel Description

Handles The number of handles

Instances The number of instances

Private Bytes The private bytes

Threads The number of threads

Working Set The working set in bytes

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2772
7.8.259 Windows System Uptime Sensor
The Windows System Uptime sensor monitors the uptime of a Windows system via Windows
Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Windows performance counters, as configured in the Windows
Compatibility Options 569 of the parent device.

Window s System Uptime Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2778 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Systeem Uptime

§ French: Windows disponibilité du système

§ German: Windows-Systemlaufzeit

§ Japanese: Windows

§ Portuguese: Tempo de ativação do sistema Windows

§ Russian: Врем я бесп еребо йн о й рабо ты систем ы Windows

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows

§ Spanish: Tiempo activo sistema Windows

Remarks
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ This sensor requires Windows Server 2008 R2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires that the Remote Registry Windows service runs on the target computer.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.

2773
§ This sensor can use a hybrid approach with Windows performance counters and WMI as fallback to
query data.

§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ This sensor has a high performance impact.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

To enable the service, log in to the respective computer and open the
services manager (for example, via services.msc). In the list, find the
respective service and set its Start Type to Automatic.

Hybrid Approach: Performance Counters and WMI

2774
For a general introduction to the technology behind WMI, see section Monitoring via WMI 3360 .

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ wmiuptimesensor

2775
Setting Description

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

2776
Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2777
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

System Uptime The system uptime

This channel is the primary channel by default.

More
Knowledge Base

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

My Windows sensors do not work when using direct performance counter access. What can I do?

2778
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/47263

2779
7.8.260 Windows Updates Status (PowerShell) Sensor
The Windows Updates Status (PowerShell) sensor monitors the status of Windows updates on a
computer and counts the available and installed Windows updates that are either from Microsoft or from
the local Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) server.

You can find the updates that the sensor considers in the Server Manager (WSUS) under Roles |
Windows Server Update Services | Update Services | Computers | Reports.

Window s Updates Status (Pow erShell) Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2786 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: Windows Updates Status (PowerShell)

§ French: Windows statut des mises à jour (PowerShell)

§ German: Windows Updates Status (PowerShell)

§ Japanese: Windows PowerShell

§ Portuguese: Status de atualizações Windows (PowerShell)

§ Russian: Статус о бн о влен ия Windows (PowerShell)

§ Simplified Chinese: Windows (PowerShell)

2780
§ Spanish: Estado de actualizaciones Windows (PowerShell)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a very high performance impact. Use it with care. We recommend that you use no
more than 50 sensors of this sensor type on each probe.
§ This sensor requires that Remote PowerShell is enabled on the target system and PowerShell 3.0
2781

on both the probe system and the target system.

§ This sensor requires Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 or later on the probe system.

§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.
§ We recommend that you set the scanning interval 2785 of this sensor to at least 12 hours to limit the
load on the server that is monitored.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

§ In certain cases, it might take some time until the sensor receives data for the first time.

§ If the sensor cannot determine any values for the Time Since Last Update channel (for example,
because the list of updates is empty), it shows the value -1s and changes to the Warning status 186 .
§ When monitoring a Remote Desktop Server (RDS) system with the option Roaming Profiles enabled,
this sensor creates a temporary user profile folder for each scanning interval. To minimize this effect,
we recommend that you set the sensor's scanning interval to at least 7 days.
§ See the Knowledge Base: Where can I find more information about PowerShell sensors?

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

Detailed Requirements

Requirement Description

Remote PowerShell This sensor uses PowerShell commands. To monitor devices with this
sensor, Remote PowerShell access must be enabled on the target
computer. Also make sure that you have installed PowerShell 3.0 or later
on both the probe system and the target system.
If you receive an error message regarding issues with the WinRM
connection, make sure that remote commands have been enabled in
PowerShell. For more details, see the Knowledge Base: How do I enable
and use remote commands in Windows PowerShell?

2781
Add Sensor
The Add Sensor 391 dialog appears when you manually add a new sensor to a device. It only shows the
settings that are required to create the sensor. You can change nearly all settings on the sensor's
Settings tab after creation.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

Setting Description

Sensor Name Enter a name to identify the sensor.

Parent Tags Shows tags 146 that the sensor inherits 146 from its parent device 142 ,
parent group 141 , and parent probe 141 .

This setting is for your information only. You cannot change it.

It is not possible to enter tags with a leading plus (+) or minus (-)
sign, nor tags with parentheses (()) or angle brackets (<>).

For performance reasons, it can take some minutes until you can
filter for new tags that you added.

The sensor has the following default tags that are automatically predefined
in the sensor's settings when you add the sensor:
§ windowsupdatesstatus

2782
Usually, a sensor connects to the IP Address/DNS Name of the parent device. See the device
settings 535 for details. For some sensors, you can explicitly define the monitoring target in the
sensor settings.

Sensor Specific

Setting Description

Port Enter the number of the port to which this sensor connects. Enter an
integer. The default port is 5985.

Port in SPN Define whether to include the port number in the Service Principal Name
(SPN) used for Kerberos authentication, for example, on devices where
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) or similar services are
installed.
§ Exclude port in SPN (default): Do not include the port number in the
SPN.

§ Include port in SPN: Include the port number in the SPN.

With this option, a client that uses a non-default SPN can

authenticate against a remote computer that uses Kerberos
authentication.

Authentication Method Select the authentication method for the connection to the host via
PowerShell. Choose between:
§ Kerberos authentication (default): The sensor uses Kerberos
authentication.
§ Negotiate authentication: The sensor uses Negotiate authentication.
For more information about Negotiate authentication, see the
Knowledge Base: Facing issues with the Windows Updates Status
(PowerShell) sensor - can you help me?

2783
Debug Options

Debug Options

Setting Description

Result Handling Define what PRTG does with the sensor result:
§ Discard result: Do not store the sensor result.

§ Store result: Store the last sensor result in the \Logs\sensors subfolder
of the PRTG data directory 3579 on the probe system. The file names are
Result of Sensor [ID].txt, Result of Sensor [ID].Data.txt, and Result of
Sensor [ID].log. This setting is for debugging purposes. PRTG
overwrites these files with each scanning interval.
In a cluster, PRTG stores the result in the PRTG data directory of the
master node.

Sensor Display

Setting Description

Graph Type Define how different channels are shown for this sensor:
§ Show channels independently (default): Show a graph for each channel.

2784
Setting Description

§ Stack channels on top of each other: Stack channels on top of each

For more information, see section Inheritance of Settings 144 .

Scanning Interval
This sensor has a fixed minimum scanning interval for performance reasons. You cannot use a
shorter scanning interval. Consequently, shorter scanning intervals in the Monitoring 3233 settings are
not available for this sensor.

The minimum scanning interval of this sensor is 1 hour.

The recommended scanning interval of this sensor is 12 hours.

Scanning Interval

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 418 , section Scanning Interval.

Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

2785
Schedules, Dependencies, and Maintenance Window

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 420 , section Schedules, Dependencies, and
Maintenance Window.

Access Rights

For more information, see section Root Group Settings 421 , section Access Rights.

Channel List
Which channels the sensor actually shows might depend on the target device, the available
components, and the sensor setup.

Channel Description

Time Since Last Update The time passed since the last update
This channel is the primary channel by default.
The sensor always creates the channel Time Since Last Update.
All other channels are optional and only show up if the sensor
can retrieve respective data.

Updates (Severity The number of hidden updates with critical severity

Critical) Hidden

2786
Channel Description

Updates (Severity The number of installed updates with critical severity

Critical) Installed

Updates (Severity The number of missing updates with critical severity

Critical) Missing

Updates (Severity The number of hidden updates with important severity

Important) Hidden

Updates (Severity The number of installed updates with important severity

Important) Installed

Updates (Severity The number of missing updates with important severity

Important) Missing

Updates (Severity Low) The number of hidden updates with low severity
Hidden

Updates (Severity Low) The number of installed updates with low severity
Installed

Updates (Severity Low) The number of missing updates with low severity
Missing

Updates (Severity The number of hidden updates with moderate severity

Moderate) Hidden

Updates (Severity The number of installed updates with moderate severity

Moderate) Installed

Updates (Severity The number of missing updates with moderate severity

Moderate) Missing

Updates (Unclassified) The number of hidden updates with unclassified severity

Hidden

Updates (Unclassified) The number of installed updates with unclassified severity

Installed

Updates (Unclassified) The number of missing updates with unclassified severity

Missing

More
Knowledge Base

2787
Where can I find more information about PowerShell sensors?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/62451

Which .NET version does PRTG require?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/60543

How do I enable and use remote commands in Windows PowerShell?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/44453

What security features does PRTG include?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61108

I have problems with the PowerShell Exchange sensors, what can I do?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/54353

My PowerShell sensor returns an error message. What can I do?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59473

I get the error "WinRM cannot process the request" when I try to use a PowerShell sensor
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/59745

How can I increase memory for Remote PowerShell?

§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/61922

Facing issues with the Windows Updates Status (PowerShell) sensor - can you help me?
§ https://kb.paessler.com/en/topic/71899

2788
7.8.261 WMI Battery Sensor
The WMI Battery sensor monitors the available capacity and the state of connected batteries of a
Windows-based device via Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI).

WMI Battery Sensor

For a detailed list and descriptions of the channels that this sensor can show, see section Channel
List 2795 .

Sensor in Other Languages

§ Dutch: WMI batterij

§ French: Batterie (WMI)

§ German: WMI Batterie

§ Japanese: WMI

§ Portuguese: Bateria (WMI)

§ Russian: Аккум улято р WMI

§ Simplified Chinese: WMI

§ Spanish: Batería (WMI)

Remarks
§ This sensor has a high performance impact. Try to stay below 200 WMI sensors in total per probe 133 .
Above this number, consider using multiple remote probes 3557 for load balancing.

2789
§ This sensor requires credentials for Windows systems 542 in the settings of the parent device.

§ This sensor requires WoW64 (Windows 32-bit on Windows 64-bit) for target systems that run
Windows Server 2016.
§ This sensor supports the IPv6 protocol.

You cannot add this sensor to the hosted probe of a PRTG Hosted Monitor instance. If you want to
use this sensor, add it to a remote probe device.

The settings that you select in the Add Sensor dialog are valid for all sensors that you create when
you finish the dialog.

WMI Battery Specific

Setting Description

Batteries Select the batteries or uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) that you
want to monitor. PRTG creates one sensor for each battery or
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) that you select.
Enable check boxes in front of the respective lines to select the
items. Use the check box in the table header to select all items or to
cancel the selection. In large tables, use the search function in the upper-
right corner.

Basic Sensor Settings

Click the Settings tab of a sensor to change its settings.

Basic Sensor Settings

2790

Prtgmanual Parte4
No ratings yet
Prtgmanual Parte4
969 pages
Gp01015fen 0215
No ratings yet
Gp01015fen 0215
228 pages
Gp01017fen 0215
No ratings yet
Gp01017fen 0215
194 pages
Z338 E1 02
No ratings yet
Z338 E1 02
444 pages
MANUAL MEDICION DE INTERFASE - Compressed
No ratings yet
MANUAL MEDICION DE INTERFASE - Compressed
230 pages
Huawei MA5600 Configuration Guide
100% (1)
Huawei MA5600 Configuration Guide
17 pages
Levelflex FMP50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,56,57 Profibus Pa
No ratings yet
Levelflex FMP50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,56,57 Profibus Pa
298 pages
Proline Promass 500 RS485 Guide
No ratings yet
Proline Promass 500 RS485 Guide
324 pages
GP 01017 Fen
No ratings yet
GP 01017 Fen
160 pages
Gp01144den 0221
No ratings yet
Gp01144den 0221
242 pages
R2000 Ethernet Communication Protocol
No ratings yet
R2000 Ethernet Communication Protocol
74 pages
Module 1
No ratings yet
Module 1
32 pages
Endress Houser FT GP01114DEN - 0117
No ratings yet
Endress Houser FT GP01114DEN - 0117
252 pages
About Command (Help Menu)
No ratings yet
About Command (Help Menu)
238 pages
P Alarm 2.0 Syslib Rm002c en e
No ratings yet
P Alarm 2.0 Syslib Rm002c en e
40 pages
Promass Q300 GP01057DEN - 0116 PDF
No ratings yet
Promass Q300 GP01057DEN - 0116 PDF
272 pages
Guidelines For PRTG Server Monitoring Setup
No ratings yet
Guidelines For PRTG Server Monitoring Setup
10 pages
Syslib rm042 - en P
No ratings yet
Syslib rm042 - en P
36 pages
P DIn Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
P DIn Instruction Manual
52 pages
Assembly Connections For Point I/O and Armorpoint I/O Ethernet/Ip Adapters
No ratings yet
Assembly Connections For Point I/O and Armorpoint I/O Ethernet/Ip Adapters
80 pages
CN Base Mib
No ratings yet
CN Base Mib
23 pages
Syslib Rm042 (P AIChan)
No ratings yet
Syslib Rm042 (P AIChan)
36 pages
1 Data Network Fundamentals
No ratings yet
1 Data Network Fundamentals
48 pages
Atv32 Canopen Manual en S1a28699 01
No ratings yet
Atv32 Canopen Manual en S1a28699 01
103 pages
Foundation Fieldbus Manual (Allen Bradley)
100% (1)
Foundation Fieldbus Manual (Allen Bradley)
184 pages
P Intlk 2.0 Syslib
No ratings yet
P Intlk 2.0 Syslib
40 pages
Electric and Electronic System in Vehicles - Topics
No ratings yet
Electric and Electronic System in Vehicles - Topics
10 pages
Cisco IPS Sensor Management Guide
No ratings yet
Cisco IPS Sensor Management Guide
19 pages
Ftae qs001 - en e
No ratings yet
Ftae qs001 - en e
246 pages
FT A&E Guide (Alarm & Events)
100% (1)
FT A&E Guide (Alarm & Events)
287 pages
Process Control Systems Guide
100% (1)
Process Control Systems Guide
63 pages
ParaListForUMTS HUAWEI Good
No ratings yet
ParaListForUMTS HUAWEI Good
5,454 pages
P DoseFM 2.0 Syslib-Rm020
No ratings yet
P DoseFM 2.0 Syslib-Rm020
88 pages
02 Modicon m218 Logic Controller System Functions and Variab
No ratings yet
02 Modicon m218 Logic Controller System Functions and Variab
104 pages
UMDAQAdaptor
No ratings yet
UMDAQAdaptor
62 pages
Session 2
No ratings yet
Session 2
60 pages
TwinLine CANopen Man V101
No ratings yet
TwinLine CANopen Man V101
274 pages
FT Alarms and Events System Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
FT Alarms and Events System Configuration Guide
288 pages
Read Threshold Setting: - Exxdrt201 - Readthreshold: Timing Chart
No ratings yet
Read Threshold Setting: - Exxdrt201 - Readthreshold: Timing Chart
3 pages
Syslib Rm014 en e
No ratings yet
Syslib Rm014 en e
80 pages
1 Docslide - Us Configuracion Dslam Ma5600
No ratings yet
1 Docslide - Us Configuracion Dslam Ma5600
17 pages
HUAWEI... Parameter Reference
No ratings yet
HUAWEI... Parameter Reference
4,362 pages
Simulator Manual
No ratings yet
Simulator Manual
26 pages
Proces rm012 - en P
No ratings yet
Proces rm012 - en P
116 pages
SMS2013 - 06 - System Interface
No ratings yet
SMS2013 - 06 - System Interface
25 pages
Sinumerik 810 Sinumerik 820 Basic Version 3 Software Version 2 Installation Lists
No ratings yet
Sinumerik 810 Sinumerik 820 Basic Version 3 Software Version 2 Installation Lists
102 pages
IEEE 802.11 WLAN Standard Guide
No ratings yet
IEEE 802.11 WLAN Standard Guide
71 pages
Sensorparameters-20250509 195935
No ratings yet
Sensorparameters-20250509 195935
7 pages
Basic Instrumentation Questions
No ratings yet
Basic Instrumentation Questions
40 pages
Presentation - 6365 - 1552304020 GENIEACS
No ratings yet
Presentation - 6365 - 1552304020 GENIEACS
54 pages
Prtgmanual Parte2
No ratings yet
Prtgmanual Parte2
930 pages
Home
No ratings yet
Home
319 pages
At Commands v2.0
No ratings yet
At Commands v2.0
451 pages
Notes Cyber Law
No ratings yet
Notes Cyber Law
61 pages
Web Services and Middleware 2.1 Web Services and Middleware
100% (1)
Web Services and Middleware 2.1 Web Services and Middleware
9 pages
Advanced Air Traffic Control System
No ratings yet
Advanced Air Traffic Control System
6 pages
Campus Enterprise Network Project
No ratings yet
Campus Enterprise Network Project
35 pages
Ethernet: PC Scada
No ratings yet
Ethernet: PC Scada
43 pages
SEBI Grade A IT Exam Guide
No ratings yet
SEBI Grade A IT Exam Guide
19 pages
BPT Eti-Domo Config
No ratings yet
BPT Eti-Domo Config
10 pages
Computer Network & Network Design
No ratings yet
Computer Network & Network Design
7 pages
The Official Comptia Cysa+ Student Guide (Exam Cs0-002)
100% (7)
The Official Comptia Cysa+ Student Guide (Exam Cs0-002)
675 pages
SYLLABUS - Engineering, VTU University
No ratings yet
SYLLABUS - Engineering, VTU University
54 pages
CCST Networking - Module 3 Quiz
No ratings yet
CCST Networking - Module 3 Quiz
5 pages
BSCS Networking Course Syllabus
No ratings yet
BSCS Networking Course Syllabus
5 pages
AFTN Internet Use Guide
No ratings yet
AFTN Internet Use Guide
20 pages
IT403 Mobile Computing
No ratings yet
IT403 Mobile Computing
2 pages
Report
No ratings yet
Report
15 pages
WIPAT Commands User Guide
No ratings yet
WIPAT Commands User Guide
125 pages
PCS7 Mini V90
No ratings yet
PCS7 Mini V90
130 pages
RS232 to TCP/IP Adapter Manual
No ratings yet
RS232 to TCP/IP Adapter Manual
14 pages
Comparison Between IOS & TCP
No ratings yet
Comparison Between IOS & TCP
8 pages
Unit I Physical Layer and Data Link Layer - 240812 - 101310
No ratings yet
Unit I Physical Layer and Data Link Layer - 240812 - 101310
87 pages
Telecom Networking Quiz
No ratings yet
Telecom Networking Quiz
6 pages
(K ROSET) (Online - Function - Manual) (E)
No ratings yet
(K ROSET) (Online - Function - Manual) (E)
27 pages
WindowsServer2012R2-Tutorial v2
No ratings yet
WindowsServer2012R2-Tutorial v2
56 pages
Zenmap & Honeybot Cybersecurity Lab Manual
No ratings yet
Zenmap & Honeybot Cybersecurity Lab Manual
31 pages
CUPPS RPv1
No ratings yet
CUPPS RPv1
37 pages
MotoTRBO Capacity Plus Setup Guide
100% (1)
MotoTRBO Capacity Plus Setup Guide
16 pages
Name - Prajwal Ghale Roll On - NP000477 Section - B: Question No.1
No ratings yet
Name - Prajwal Ghale Roll On - NP000477 Section - B: Question No.1
4 pages
Setup Computer Networks
No ratings yet
Setup Computer Networks
22 pages
SConfigurator User Guide
100% (1)
SConfigurator User Guide
83 pages
Networking Basics A Beginners Guide
No ratings yet
Networking Basics A Beginners Guide
9 pages